Alfa Romeo 2018 Stelvio suv 2018 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO User Manual

ALFA ROMEO STELVIO

Third Edition Rev 1

Owner’s Manual

ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Printed in U.S.A.

2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

18GU-126-AC

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name

FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

DEAR CUSTOMER

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.

We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.

Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.

Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance

from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.

You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar

with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on

different road surfaces.

This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving,

care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.

In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New

Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people

at Alfa Romeo.

For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling

Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components

of the supply system.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel, refer to "Fuel Requirements" in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push

the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable

material, as doing so is a fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the

environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an authorized dealer.

They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and

safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

Rollover Warning

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a

higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it

may roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to

operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government

notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce

disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

010301031

Rollover Warning Label

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS

Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could

even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or

accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel

will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a

more powerful battery.

Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation

of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the

pedal (mats, etc.).

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US

LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices

FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance

with manufacturer's specifications.

Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed.

This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US

LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a

separate antenna is mounted externally.

Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of

approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction.

This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive

Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.

HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL

Operating Instructions

Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the

perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the

text as appropriate.

The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual

arrangement of your vehicle.

To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to

know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the

side of each even page.

Warnings And Cautions

While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the

components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.

Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety:

Vehicle Safety:

Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional equipment meant for specific markets or particular models

are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content

introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be

identified by the indicator: — if equipped.

The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for

constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described

for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact your authorized dealer.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is

important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNER

HANDBOOK

DO NOTTOUCHWITH

HANDS

COMPONENT CAN START

AUTOMATICALLY ALSO

WHEN ENGINE IS OFF

PROTECTYOUR EYES

DO NOTOPEN THE CAP

WHEN THE ENGINE IS

HOT

DO NOTOPEN: HIGH

PRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT A

DISTANCE

BURSTING

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS

OF YOUR BODY AND

CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOTAPPROACH

FLAMES

CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

This page is intentionally left blank

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

This page is intentionally left blank

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONTVIEW

03016V0001EM

Front View

1 — Headlights 4 — Mirrors

2 — Engine Compartment 5 — Doors

3 — Windshield 6 — Wheels And Tires

REAR VIEW

03026V0001EM

Rear View

1 — Tail Lights

2 — Liftgate

INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036V0001EM

Instrument Panel

1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls

2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment

3 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag

4 — Controls On The Steering Wheel 8 — Information and Entertainment

System

VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046V0001EM

Vehicle Interior

1 — Driver Seat 4 — Gear Selector

2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Drive Mode Selector

3 — Hazard Warning Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important

information to help you become familiar

with the features needed to operate your

vehicle, and how they function.

KEYS ....................16

IGNITION SYSTEM ............19

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER .........21

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED .................22

DOORS...................23

SEATS....................28

HEAD RESTRAINTS ...........33

STEERING WHEEL ............35

MIRRORS ..................36

EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............37

INTERIOR LIGHTS ............40

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ..........43

HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF

EQUIPPED .................45

CLIMATE CONTROL ...........45

POWERWINDOWS............52

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .54

HOOD....................55

POWER LIFTGATE ............56

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .........61

KEYS

Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition

system. This system includes a key fob

and a keyless push button ignition.

The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows

you to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from

a distance. The key fob does not need to

be pointed at the vehicle to activate the

system.

PANIC Function

The key fob contains a PANIC button.

Should you ever feel threatened, push

this button and the vehicle security alarm

will sound.

To activate the PANIC function, push and

hold the PANIC button for at least one

second. When the panic alarm is active,

the headlights turn on, the turn signals

flash, the horn honks intermittently, and

all interior adjustable lights turn on. The

panic alarm will remain active for three

minutes, and can be deactivated:

By pushing the PANIC button again.

Automatically if the vehicle speed

exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

In both cases, the panic alarm is

immediately deactivated.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK, apply

the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,

remove the key fob from the vehicle and

lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Operation

Unlocking The Doors And The Liftgate

Briefly pushing the unlock button on the

key fob will unlock the doors and liftgate,

turn on the interior lights, and flash the

turn signals once (if activated from the

Information and Entertainment System).

Push and release the unlock button on the

key fob once to unlock the driver side

front door or twice within one second to

unlock all doors and the liftgate.

It is, however, possible to change the

current setting through the Information

and Entertainment System menu, so that

the system unlocks:

All doors on the first push of the key

fob unlock button.

The driver door on the first push of the

key fob unlock button.

The liftgate "independently" or "with

doors".

Flashing of the turn signals upon

locking/unlocking the doors, and

activation of the courtesy light upon

unlocking the doors, can be activated or

deactivated through the Information and

Entertainment System. For further

information, refer to the Information and

Entertainment System Owner’s Manual

Supplement.

The doors can also be unlocked by using

the emergency key, located inside the

key fob.

04016S0001EM

Key Fob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Door And Liftgate Locking

Briefly pushing the lock button on the key

fob will lock the doors and liftgate, switch

off the internal lights, and flash the turn

signals (if activated in the Information

and Entertainment System).

If one or more doors are open, these

doors will also lock, and this is indicated

by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The

doors will unlock again only if the key fob

is detected inside the passenger

compartment.

The doors can be locked by using the

emergency key in the driver’s side door

lock.

Opening The Liftgate

Rapidly push the button on the key fob

twice to open the liftgate. The turn

signals will flash to indicate that the

liftgate has been opened.

Remote Start

The remote start

button on the key fob

enables engine starting

(push the remote start

button on the key fob

twice to enable engine

starting).

Car Finder

The Car Finder feature will temporarily

activate the turn signals and headlights

to assist with locating the vehicle in a

crowded area.

To activate, push the lock or unlock

button to remotely and temporarily

activate the turn signals and headlights.

Pushing the lock or unlock button again

will reactivate the lights switch on timer

(if the parking lights function was already

active, it will remain active).

This function is available only if the doors

are closed.

Replacing The Electronic Key Fob

Battery

To replace the battery, proceed as

follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward

and extract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from its

housing.

04016S0099EM

Key Fob

04016S0002EM

Key Fob Cover Removal

04016S0003EM

Removing Emergency Key

3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it

counter clockwise.

4. Remove the battery from its slot and

replace it with a new one of the same

type.

Proceed in reverse order to reassemble

the key.

Caution!

The battery replacement operation must be

done with care, in order not to damage the

electronic key.

Request For Additional Keys

The system can recognize up to eight key

fobs with remote control.

To guarantee that the engine starts and

the vehicle operates correctly, use only

electronic key fobs specifically coded for

the vehicle’s electronics.

If an electronic key fob is coded for a

vehicle, it cannot be used on any other

vehicle.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all radio frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

04016S0004EM

Removing Battery Plug

04016S0005EM

Battery Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SYSTEM

Operation

To activate the keyless ignition, the key

fob must be inside the vehicle.

The keyless ignition has the following

modes:

STOP: engine off, steering locked.

Some electrical devices (e.g. central door

locking system, alarm, etc.) are still

available.

ON: all electrical devices are available.

This state can be entered by pushing the

ignition button once, without pressing the

brake pedal.

AVV: engine starting. This state can be

entered by pushing the ignition button

once while pressing the brake pedal.

Note:

With the keyless ignition in the ON

position: if 30 minutes pass with the

gear selector in P (Park) and the engine

stopped, the keyless ignition will

automatically reset to the STOP

position.

With the engine started, it is possible

to remove the key fob from the vehicle.

The engine will remain running and the

instrument cluster will indicate the

absence of the key fob when the door is

closed.

For more information on engine start-up,

refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting

And Operating."

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as a

substitute for the parking brake. Always

apply the parking brake fully when parked

to guard against vehicle movement and

possible injury or damage.

When exiting the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove

the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your

vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to

touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in the

AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fully

disengaged before driving; failure to do so

can lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause

damage or injury. Also be certain to leave

the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so

may allow the vehicle to roll and cause

damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake

engaged, or repeated use of the parking

brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious

damage to the brake system.

Caution!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains

on with the parking brake released, a brake

system malfunction is indicated. Have the

brake system serviced by an authorized

dealer immediately.

04026S0001EM

Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button

Starting With A Discharged Key Fob

Battery

If the key fob battery is discharged,

proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline

found on the floor of the armrest

compartment while pushing the

START/STOP button to start the ignition.

Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

passive electronic steering wheel lock.

The steering wheel lock is engaged when

the driver door is opened with the ignition

OFF. The steering wheel lock releases

when the ignition is cycled ON.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all radio frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

04026V0002EM

Key Fob Placement Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

Engine Immobilizer Operation

The Engine Immobilizer system prevents

unauthorized use of the vehicle by

disabling engine starting.

The system does not need to be enabled

or activated. Operation of the

immobilizer is automatic whether the

vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.

When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine

Immobilizer system identifies the code

transmitted by the key. If the code is

recognized as valid, the Engine

Immobilizer system enables engine

starting.

When the ignition is brought back to

STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system

deactivates the engine control unit,

disabling engine starting.

For the correct engine starting

procedures, refer to “Starting The

Engine” in “Starting And Operating.”

Irregular Operation

If the key code is not recognized during

starting, the Engine Immobilizer

Failure/Break-in Attempt

icon is

displayed on the instrument panel (refer

to "Warning Lights And Messages" in

"Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel"). This condition leads to the engine

turning off after two seconds. In this

case, switch the ignition to STOP and

then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with

the other keys provided. If it is still not

possible to start the engine, contact an

authorized dealer.

If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/

Break-in Attempt

icon is displayed

while driving, this means that the system

is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a

voltage drop). If the display persists,

contact an authorized dealer.

Note:

Do not tamper with the Engine

Immobilizer system. Any modifications

or alterations could cause the protection

function to be deactivated.

The Engine Immobilizer system is not

compatible with certain aftermarket

remote starting systems. The use of

these devices could cause problems

when starting, as well as the

deactivation of the protection function.

All keys provided with the vehicle

have been programmed in accordance

with the electronics on the vehicle itself.

Each key has its own code which must

be stored by the system's control unit.

Contact an authorized dealer to have

new keys (up to eight) stored with a

code.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

Alarm Activation

The vehicle security alarm monitors the

vehicle doors and ignition for

unauthorized operation. When the vehicle

security alarm is activated, interior

switches for door locks are disabled. The

system provides both audible and visible

signals.

While armed, the alarm will sound in the

following scenarios:

Opening of doors/hood/liftgate

(perimeter protection)

Operation of ignition with a key which

is not validated

Cutting of the battery cables

Movement inside the passenger

compartment (volumetric protection — if

equipped)

Unexpected lifting/tilting of the

vehicle (anti-lift protection — if

equipped)

Activation of the alarm triggers the

acoustic warning and the turn signals.

Note: The alarm system is activated by

the Engine Immobilizer system, which is

automatically activated when you get out

of the vehicle with the key fob and lock

the doors.

To Arm The Alarm

With the doors, hood, and liftgate closed

and the keyless ignition system placed in

the STOP position, push and release the

lock button on the key fob. The alarm can

also be armed by pushing the Passive

Entry door handle button, located on the

exterior door handle. Refer to "Doors" in

"Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for

further information.

When the alarm is armed, the warning

lights on the door handle trim remain on.

The activation of the alarm is preceded

by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is

detected, the system emits a further

acoustic signal.

If a second acoustic signal is emitted

after the alarm is already armed, wait

about four seconds and disarm the alarm

by pushing the unlock switch. Verify that

the doors, hood, and liftgate are closed

correctly. Then, reactivate the system by

pushing the lock switch.

If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even

when the doors, hood, and liftgate are

correctly closed, a fault has occurred in

system operation. In this case, contact an

authorized dealer.

To Disarm The Alarm

Push the unlock button on the key fob to

disarm the alarm. While disarming, the

following operations are performed:

Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if

programmed).

Two brief acoustic signals (if

programmed).

Doors are unlocked.

The alarm can also be disarmed using the

Passive Entry System, by grasping one of

the Passive Entry front door handles with

a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For

further information refer to "Passive

Entry" in "Doors."

Note: The alarm does not disarm when

the doors are unlocked by inserting the

blade of the emergency key into the door

handle lock cylinder.

Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped

The vehicle security alarm system

monitors the doors and liftgate for

unauthorized entry and the ignition

switch for unauthorized operation.

To ensure the correct operation of the

protection, completely close the side

windows. If a perimeter violation triggers

04046V0001EM

Lock/Unlock Switches

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

the security system, the alarm will sound

and the exterior lights will flash.

To ensure the correct operation of the

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,

completely close the side windows.

To disable the function, push the

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button

before activating the alarm.

When the function is disabled, this is

indicated by the light on the

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button

flashing for several seconds.

Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift

Protection must be repeated each time

the ignition is cycled off.

To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive

Entry

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.

during a long period of vehicle inactivity),

insert the blade of the emergency key,

found inside the key fob, into the door

handle lock cylinder and turn the

emergency key to the right (clockwise) to

lock the door(s).

DOORS

Locking And Unlocking Doors From The

Inside

If all doors are closed properly, they will

automatically lock once the vehicle has

exceeded approximately 12 MPH

(20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active).

Push the interior lock button on the driver

or passenger side door panel trim to lock

the doors.

Push the interior lock button on the rear

door panel trim to lock the rear doors

only.

With doors locked, push the unlock

button on the interior trim panel to

unlock the doors.

04046S0002EM

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button

04056V0001EM

Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

Warning!

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

For personal security and safety in the

event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as

you drive as well as when you park and leave

the vehicle.

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK, apply

the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,

remove the key fob from the vehicle and

lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always

remove the key from the ignition and lock all

of the doors when leaving the vehicle

unattended.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The

Outside

When locking the doors from the outside

with the doors closed, push the lock

button on the key fob.

The door lock can be activated with all

doors locked and the liftgate open. When

the lock button on the key fob is pushed,

all locks are activated, including the

liftgate if it is open. The liftgate will be

locked when it is closed.

When unlocking the doors from the

outside, push the unlock button on the

key fob.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The

Outside In An Emergency

If the battery is discharged or the key fob

is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the

doors from the outside by inserting the

blade of the emergency key, found inside

the key fob, into the door handle lock

cylinder and turn the emergency key as

follows.

Lock — Turn the emergency key to the

right (clockwise)

Unlock — Turn the emergency key to

the left (counter clockwise)

Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system can identify

the presence of a key fob near the doors

and liftgate.

The system enables the doors and

liftgate to be locked or unlocked without

pushing any button on the key fob.

The key fob is detected only after the

system recognizes the presence of a

hand on one of the front door handles. If

the detected key fob is valid, the doors

and the liftgate are unlocked (refer to the

Information and Entertainment System

Owner’s Manual Supplement for Passive

Entry Settings).

Note: The key fob may not be able to be

detected by the vehicle keyless-go

system if it is located next to a mobile

phone, laptop, or other electronic device;

these devices may block the key fob’s

wireless signal and prevent the

keyless-go system from starting the

vehicle.

Grasping the handle of the driver's door

unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors

depending on the mode set using the

Information and Entertainment System

(refer to the Information and

Entertainment System Owner’s Manual

Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained

and the door handle is wet, the activation

sensitivity of the Passive Entry function

may be reduced, resulting in a longer

reaction time.

Door Locking

To lock the doors, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that you have the key fob

and are close to the driver’s or

passenger’s side door handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handle

button or the Passive Entry liftgate

button, which is located next to the

external liftgate release button. This will

lock all doors and the liftgate. Door

locking will activate the alarm as well.

Note: After pushing the Passive Entry

door handle button, you must wait two

seconds before the doors can be

unlocked again using the passive entry

door handle button. This feature makes it

possible to check whether the vehicle has

been locked correctly by pulling the door

handle within two seconds. The doors will

not be unlocked again.

The vehicle doors and liftgate can be

locked by pushing the lock button on the

key fob or on the interior door lock.

Driver Side Door Emergency Opening

If the key fob does not work, e.g. because

its battery is discharged or the vehicle

battery is discharged, the emergency key

can be used to unlock the driver side

door.

To remove the emergency key from the

key fob, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward

and extract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from the

key fob housing.

3. Insert the emergency key in the driver

side door lock cylinder and turn it to the

left (counter clockwise) to unlock the

door.

Note:

The emergency key blade is not

directional and can be inserted

indifferently into the lock.

04056S0003EM

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

04056V0005EM

External Liftgate Release Button

04016S0002EM

Emergency Key Release Buttons

04016S0003EM

Emergency Key

To avoid leaving the key fob inside

the vehicle accidentally, the Passive

Entry function features an automatic

door unlocking function.

Once all of the vehicle doors are

closed and locked, the vehicle will

attempt to locate the key fob inside or

outside of the vehicle.

While pulling the handle, do not push the

door lock/unlock button on the handle.

If the key fob is detected inside the

vehicle, the Passive Entry function

automatically unlocks all the vehicle

doors and flashes the turn signals.

If one or more key fobs are inside the

passenger compartment, the lock button

on the key fob inside the passenger

compartment is temporarily disabled.

The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an

unauthorized key fob has been detected

close to the outside of the vehicle.

If the Passive Entry function is disabled

using the Information and Entertainment

System, the keyless-go system to avoid

accidentally leaving the key fob inside

the vehicle is deactivated.

Liftgate Access

Approaching the liftgate with a valid key

fob, push the opening button to open the

liftgate.

Note:

If the key fob is inadvertently

forgotten inside of the cargo area, and

an attempt is made to close it from

outside, the liftgate will not lock. With

the doors locked, the liftgate unlocked,

and the key fob detected inside the

vehicle, the liftgate will unlock again and

the lights flash twice.

Before driving, make sure the

liftgate is closed correctly.

04056S0003EM

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

04056V0001EM

Interior Lock Switch Panel

04056S0004EM

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When

Locking

04056V0005EM

External Liftgate Release Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Liftgate Lock

The liftgate of the vehicle may still be

locked by pushing the lock button on the

key fob, pushing the door lock button on

the door handles, or pushing the lock

button on the interior door panel of the

vehicle.

On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry,

the liftgate and the doors can be locked

by pushing the button located near the

opening button of the liftgate.

System Activation/Deactivation

The Passive Entry system can be

activated or deactivated using the

Information and Entertainment System.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all radio frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Power Lock

The power lock is a safety device that

prevents the operation of the interior

door handles and the door lock and

unlock buttons. The power lock also

prevent opening of the doors from inside

the passenger compartment.

It is recommended to lock the vehicle

doors each time the vehicle is parked.

Activating The Power Lock

The power lock is enabled on all the doors

by quickly pushing the lock button on the

key fob twice.

The turn signals will flash to let you know

that the power lock is active.

If one or more of the doors are not closed

correctly, the power lock will not activate,

preventing a person from getting stuck

inside the passenger compartment by

entering the vehicle, and then closing, the

open door.

Deactivating The Power Lock

The power lock disengages

automatically:

When the doors are unlocked, pushing

the unlock button on the key fob.

When the keyless ignition is placed in

the ON position.

Child Safety Locks

To provide a safer environment for small

children riding in the rear seats, the rear

doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

This device can only be engaged with the

doors open.

Lock position: device locked (door

opened from exterior only)

Unlock position: device unlocked (door

may be opened from the inside)

04056V0005EM

Passive Entry Liftgate Button

04056S0007EM

Child Safety Lock Positions

The Child Safety Locks remain locked

even if the doors are unlocked.

Note: The rear doors cannot be opened

from the inside when the Child Safety

Lock is engaged.

Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged

Battery

Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if

the vehicle battery is discharged.

1. With the doors unlocked insert the

emergency key from the key fob into the

door lock manual release lock cylinder.

2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder

clockwise for the right door locks or

counterclockwise for the left door locks.

3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the

manual release lock.

Proceed in one of the following ways to

realign the door lock device (only when

the battery charge has been restored):

Push the lock button on the electronic

key

Push the unlock button on the door

panel

Unlock driver’s door lock with the

emergency key

Operate the internal door handle

Note: For the rear doors, if the Child

Safety Locks are engaged, and the

previously described locking procedure is

carried out, operating the internal handle

will not open the door. Instead, it will only

realign the lock release device. To open

the door, the outside handle must be

used. The door central locking/unlocking

buttons are not deactivated when the

emergency lock is engaged.

SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted to ensure

maximum comfort for the occupants.

When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep

the shoulders resting firmly against the

backrest, the wrists within reach of the

top of the steering wheel, and the seat

close enough to allow the driver to fully

depress the brake pedal.

Warning!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more likely

to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

04056S0008EM

Door Lock Manual Release Lock

Cylinder

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Front Seats

The power seat switch is located on the

outboard side of the seat near the floor.

Use this switch to move the driver's seat

up, down, forward, and rearward, or to

recline the seatback.

Caution!

Do not place any article under a power seat

or impede its ability to move as it may cause

damage to the seat controls. Seat travel

may become limited if movement is stopped

by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Forward/Rearward Adjustment

Push the seat switch forward or rearward

to adjust to your desired position.

Seatback Recline

The angle of the seatback can be

adjusted forward or rearward. Push the

seatback switch forward or rearward,

and the seat will move in the direction of

the switch. Release the switch when the

desired position is reached.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or

passenger seats may also be equipped

with power lumbar. The power lumbar

switch is located on the outboard side of

the power seat. Push the switch forward

or rearward to increase or decrease the

lumbar support. Push the switch upward

or downward to raise or lower the lumbar

support.

Height Adjustment

The height of the seats can be adjusted

up or down. Pull upward or push

downward on the seat switch, and the

seat will move in the direction of the

switch. Release the switch when the

desired position is reached.

Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If

Equipped

The seat angle can be adjusted in four

directions. Lift or push the front part of

seat switch to move the front part of the

seat in the corresponding direction.

Release the seat switch when the seat

has reached the desired position.

Power Bolster Adjustment — If

Equipped

Push the power bolster adjustment

buttons to regulate the width of the

backrest through the lateral padding.

Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped

Lift the adjustment lever and push the

front of the cushion forward or rearward

to extend the cushion by a few inches

(centimeters).

04066V0003EM

Power Seat Adjustment

1 — Seat Switch (For/Rear/Height Ad-

justment)

2 — Seatback Switch

3 — Lumbar Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons

— If Equipped

04066S0017EM

Seat Cushion Extension

6 — Adjustment Lever

Driver Memory Seat

The driver memory seat buttons can

store and recall three different driver’s

seat positions, as well as outside power

mirror positions. Storing and recalling

can be done with the ignition in the ON

mode, vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h),

and the driver’s side door closed, or for

3 minutes after having opened the

driver's side door. An audible chime is

heard to confirm a memory profile is set

or recalled. To set a memory profile, first

adjust your seat (and power mirror

position if desired) until you are in the

desired position. Then, push the memory

button you want to assign the set

position to for 1.5 seconds. When a new

seat position is memorized, the

previously memorized position on the

same button is automatically

overwritten. Recalling a memorized

position can also be done for

approximately 3 minutes after the doors

are opened and for approximately

1 minute after the engine is stopped. To

recall a memorized position, push the

assigned button briefly.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which could

cause a collision and serious injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before

fastening the seat belts and while the

vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death

could result from a poorly adjusted seat

belt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so

that the shoulder belt is no longer resting

against your chest. In a collision you could

slide under the seat belt, which could result

in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

Front Heated Seats

With the engine in the ON position, push

the driver or passenger heated seat

button

located on the instrument

panel.

You can select three heating levels:

Maximum — Three orange indicators

illuminated on the buttons

Average — Two orange indicators

illuminated on the buttons

Minimum — One orange indicator

illuminated on the buttons

After selecting a heating level, heat will

be felt within a few minutes.

A quick push of the heated seat button

will select the heat levels in order of

highest to lowest. A fourth push of the

button will turn the heated seat off.

04066V0015EM

Driver Memory Seat Buttons Location

5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons

04066V0004EM1

Heated Seat Buttons

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The “Minimum” setting is automatically

deactivated once a certain period of time

has elapsed. This varies on a

case-by-case basis, in accordance with

the specific operating conditions.

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

If equipped with rear heated seats, the

controls can be found on the rear of the

center console and will function the same

as the front heated seat controls.

Note: To preserve the battery charge,

these functions cannot be activated

when the engine is OFF.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the

skin because of advanced age, chronic

illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,

medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other

physical condition must exercise care when

using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used

for long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat or

seatback that insulates against heat, such

as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat

that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface

temperature of the seat.

Rear Seats

The rear seats allow for three

passengers.

The seats and the seat belts are

considered components of the vehicle’s

Occupant Restraint System.

Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems"

in the "Safety" chapter for the proper

positioning of the seat belts.

Split Folding Rear Seat

The rear seat allows the luggage

compartment to be partially (40/20/40)

or totally extended.

Partial Extension Of The Luggage

Compartment (40/20/40)

Extending the right side of the luggage

compartment allows you to carry two

passengers on the left part of the rear

seat, while extending the left side allows

you to carry one passenger.

Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat head

restraints.

2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't

impede the movement of the backrest

while tilting it.

3. Pull the left-hand seat back release

lever (inside the luggage compartment or

the release at the base of the rear seat

accessible from the rear doors) to fold

down the left side, or the right-hand seat

back release lever to fold down the right

side of the backrest. It will fold forwards

automatically. If necessary, assist the

backrest during the initial stage of tilting.

04066V0005EM

Split Folding Rear Seat

04066V0009EM

Seat Back Release Lever In Luggage

Compartment

1 — Seat Back Release Lever

Full Expansion Of The Luggage

Compartment

Tilting the rear seat completely forward

allows for maximum loading volume.

Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat head

restraints.

2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't

impede the movement of the backrest

while tilting it.

3. Pull both seat back release levers to

fold down the backrests. They will fold

forward automatically. If necessary,

assist the backrests during the initial

stage of tilting.

It is also possible to disengage the

sections of the rear seat from inside the

luggage compartment or by using one of

the two levers located below the rear

seat. Each lever folds down the section of

the backrest on the same side.

Repositioning The Backrests

Move the seat belts to the side, making

sure that they are correctly extended and

not twisted. Also make sure that they are

not caught on anything behind the

backrests of the seats. Then, lift the

backrests by pushing them rearward until

you hear the lock click into place on both

attachment mechanisms.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is securely

locked into position. If the seatback is not

securely locked into position the seat will not

provide the proper stability for child seats

and/or passengers. An improperly latched

seat could cause serious injury.

Central Backrest Section Tilting

Before tilting the backrest, make sure

that the rear center seat belt is not

fastened and that there aren't any

objects on the seat itself (if there are any,

remove them).

Pull the release strap upward to release

the central part of the backrest from its

housing and tilt it forward using the head

restraint.

Central Backrest Section Repositioning

Using the head restraint, lift the central

portion upwards, manually guiding it back

into place. Lightly push to make sure that

it is properly latched. Make sure that the

armrest is properly latched by gently

trying to move it. If it is not latched,

repeat the operation.

04066V0007EM

Seat Back Release Lever Below Rear

Seat

04066V0008EM

Center Backrest Section Tilting

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce

the risk of injury by restricting head

movement in the event of a rear impact.

Head restraints should be adjusted so

that the top of the head restraint is

located above the top of your ear.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in

a collision or hard stop could cause serious

injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head

restraints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be

reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect

the occupants. Follow the re-installation

instructions above prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat.

Do not place items over the top of the

Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats,

seat covers or portable DVD players. These

items may interfere with the operation of

the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of

a collision and could result in serious injury

or death.

Front Head Restraints (Adjustments)

The front head restraints may be

height-adjustable. To adjust them,

operate as follows:

Upward adjustment: Pull upward on

the head restraint until it clicks into

place.

Downward adjustment: Push the

adjustment button and lower the head

restraint at the same time.

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver, should

not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat

until the head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to minimize the

risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjusted

while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious

injury or death in the event of a collision.

Note: To allow for maximum visibility for

the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a

passenger, the head restraint can be

lowered to the fully lowered position.

Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver, should

not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat

until the head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to minimize the

risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjusted

while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious

injury or death in the event of a collision.

0322125341US

Front Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

The height of the outboard head

restraints can be adjusted. The head

restraint of the center seat, if equipped,

cannot be adjusted, only removed.

For upward adjustment, pull upward on

the head restraint until it clicks into

place.

For downward adjustment, push in the

adjustment button and lower the head

restraint at the same time to the desired

height.

Note: To allow for maximum visibility for

the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a

passenger, the head restraint should be

lowered to the fully lowered position.

Head Restraints (Removal)

To remove the head restraints, proceed

as follows:

1. Recline the seat back to allow

clearance of the head restraint from the

vehicle’s roof.

2. Raise the head restraints to their

maximum height.

3. Push the adjustment button and the

release button at the side of the two

supports at the same time.

4. Pull upward on the head restraint to

fully remove it.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceed

as follows:

1. Hold down both the adjustment

button and release button while placing

the head restraint posts into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraint to

the appropriate height for the

passengers.

3. Replace the seat back to the

appropriate position for passengers.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in

a collision or hard stop could cause serious

injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head

restraints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be

reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect

the occupants. Follow the re-installation

instructions above prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat.

04066V0010EM

Rear Head Restraint

1 — Adjustment Button

2 — Release Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

STEERING WHEEL

Steering Wheel Adjustments

The steering column is able to be tilted

upward or downward. It also allows you

to lengthen or shorten the steering

column. The tilt/telescoping lever is

located below the steering wheel at the

end of the steering column.

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column while

driving. Adjusting the steering column while

driving or driving with the steering column

unlocked, could cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this

warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control

Handle down to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the

desired position.

3. Lock the desired position by pushing

the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to

the closed position.

Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any

after-market operation involving steering

system or steering column modifications

(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that

could adversely affect performance. Doing

so could void the New Vehicle Limited

Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY

PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and also

result in the vehicle not meeting

type-approval requirements.

04086V0001EM

Steering Wheel Adjustment

1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

2 — Closed

3 — Open

4 — Tilt Movement

5 — Telescoping Movement

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

With the ignition in the ON position, push

the heated steering wheel

button on

the instrument panel.

The indicator on the button will illuminate

when this feature is enabled.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the

skin because of advanced age, chronic

illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,

medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other

physical conditions must exercise care when

using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures,

especially if used for long periods.

Do not place anything on the steering

wheel that insulates against heat, such as a

blanket or steering wheel covers of any type

and material. This may cause the steering

wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS

Electrochromic Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for

headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

The electrochromic mirror has a power

button to activate/deactivate the

automatic dimming/anti-glare function.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

automatic dimming feature is

deactivated.

Exterior Power Mirrors

Power Adjustment

The power mirrors can be adjusted with

the ignition ON .

Select the desired mirror by rotating the

power mirror control knob to the left (L)

or right (R) position.

To adjust the selected mirror, push the

knob in the direction desired.

Note: Once adjustment is complete,

rotate the knob to the neutral position to

prevent accidental movements.

Power Folding

With the power mirror control knob in the

neutral position, rotate it to the power

folding position. Rotate the knob back to

the neutral position to return the mirrors

to the driving position.

If the power mirror control knob is moved

again during door mirror folding (from

closed to open position and vice versa),

the movement direction is reversed.

04086V0002EM1

Heated Steering Wheel Button

04106S0002EM

Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

04106V0004EM

Power Mirror Control

1 — Power Mirror Control Knob

A — Left

B — Right

C — Power Folding Position

D — Neutral

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Activation

Activating the central door locking

system from outside the vehicle

automatically folds the mirrors. The

mirrors return to the driving position

when the vehicle is then unlocked.

If the door mirrors were folded using the

power mirror control knob, they can only

be returned to the driving position by

rotating the knob again.

Note: The power folding operation can

be enabled only when the vehicle speed is

lower than 31 mph (50 km/h).

Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If

Equipped

Like the electrochromic mirror, an

automatic dimming feature is also

available on the outside rear view mirrors

to prevent glare. The automatic dimming

button for these mirrors is the same as

the electrochromic mirror.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside

convex mirror will look smaller and farther

away than they really are. Relying too much

on side convex mirrors could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object.

Use your inside mirror when judging the size

or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex

mirror.

Heated Mirrors

Push the rear defrost button, located

within the climate controls, to activate

the heated mirrors.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located to the left

of the steering wheel on the instrument

panel. This switch controls the operation

of the headlights, parking lights,

instrument panel lights, instrument panel

light dimming, interior lights and rear fog

lights.

In addition, there are buttons for parking

sensors deactivation and stop/start.

Refer to “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

04106V0005EM

Folding Mirror

04126V0001NA

Headlight Switch

1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation

Button

2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running

Lights, Headlight Switch

3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

4 — Rear Fog Light Button

5 — Stop/Start Button

The exterior lights can be activated only

when the ignition is in the ON mode,

except for the parking lights. Refer to

"Parking Lights" in this section for more

information.

The instrument panel and the various

controls on the dashboard will be

illuminated when the exterior lights are

turned on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns the

headlights on or off according to ambient

light levels.

Function Activation

From the O (off) position, rotate the light

switch to the

(auto) position.

Note: The function can only operate with

the ignition position cycled to ON.

Function Deactivation

To deactivate the function, rotate the

light switch to a position other than the

(auto) position.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

With the ignition cycled to ON, and the

light switch turned to the

position, if

the dusk sensor detects sufficient

external light, the Daytime Running

Lights will turn on automatically while the

other lights remain off.

If the turn signals are operated, the

brightness of the corresponding Daytime

Running Lights will be decreased for as

long as the turn signals are on.

If equipped, the DRL can be

activated/deactivated from the

Information and Entertainment System,

by selecting the following functions in

sequence on the main MENU:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Daytime Lights.”

Note: The Daytime Running Lights

cannot be deactivated in Canadian

markets.

Rear Fog Lights

The rear fog light switch is located within

the headlight switch.

Push the

button, located in the center

of the headlight switch, to turn the rear

fog lights on/off.

The rear fog lights turn on only when the

headlights or parking lights are also

turned on. The lights can be turned off by

pushing the

button again or by turning

the headlight switch to the O (off)

position.

When the engine is stopped with the rear

fog lights on, they will be off the next

time the engine is started.

Parking Lights

With the ignition in STOP mode, rotate

the headlight switch to the

position to

turn the parking lights on. All of the

parking lights will turn on for eight

minutes, and opening the door activates

an audible warning.

To leave only the lights on one side

(right/left) illuminated, you must move

the multifunction lever (located on the

left side of the steering wheel) to the side

that you want to remain on. With the

parking lights on, the

warning light on

the instrument panel will illuminate.

Note: Cycling the ignition to ON mode

turns off the parking lights, which were

only illuminated on one side.

Headlight Off Delay

The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays

the turning off of the headlights after the

vehicle’s engine has been stopped.

The function can be activated from the

Information and Entertainment System

by selecting the following functions in

sequence on the main menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Headlight Off Delay.”

The side lights and the headlights stay on

for a time that can be set between 30,

60, and 90 seconds.

Function Activation

With the headlights on, cycle the ignition

to STOP mode and the timer will start.

Note: To activate this function, the

headlights must be deactivated within

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

two minutes after the ignition has been

cycled to the STOP mode.

Function Deactivation

This function is deactivated by turning on

the headlights, the side lights, or by

cycling the ignition to ON mode.

Adaptive Headlight System (AFS) — If

Equipped

This is a system combined with Xenon

headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if

equipped) which directs the headlights

horizontally, and continuously and

automatically adapts them to the driving

conditions around bends or when

cornering.

The system directs the headlights to light

up the road in the best way, taking into

account the speed of the vehicle and the

bend or corner angle, as well as the speed

of steering.

The adaptive lights are automatically

activated when the vehicle is started.

High Beam Headlights

To activate the fixed high beam

headlights, push the multifunction lever,

located on the left side of the steering

wheel, towards the instrument panel. The

headlight switch must first be turned to

the

(auto) or (on) position.

With high beam headlights on, the

High Beam Indicator on the

instrument panel will illuminate.

The high beam headlights are turned off

by pulling the multifunction lever

rearward to its original position. The

warning light/icon

will turn off in the

instrument panel when the high beams

are turned off.

Flashing The Headlights

Pulling the multifunction lever toward the

steering wheel will activate the high

beam headlights manually. The lights will

remain on as long as the lever is held.

Once the lever is released, the lights will

resume the previous setting.

Automatic High Beam Headlights — If

Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlights

system provides increased forward

lighting at night by automating high beam

control through the use of a digital

camera mounted on the windshield. This

camera detects vehicle specific light and

automatically turns from high beams to

low beams until the approaching vehicle

is out of view.

This function is enabled when “Automatic

High Beam” is turned to “ON” within the

Information and Entertainment System,

and is then activated by rotating the

headlight switch to the

(auto)

position and pushing the multifunction

lever toward the instrument panel.

While the high beam headlights are on,

the blue icon/warning light

will

illuminate in the instrument panel.

Note: The “On” selection within the

Information and Entertainment System is

saved if the vehicle is cycled OFF, and

then back ON.

When the speed is higher than 37 mph

(60 km/h) and the function is active, the

lights will turn off if the multifunction

lever is pushed again.

When the speed is lower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and the function is active, the

feature will turn the high beam headlights

off.

If the high beam headlights are operated

again (pushing the multifunction lever

towards the instrument panel), the

warning light/icon

will illuminate in the

instrument panel, and the main beam

headlights only will be on until the speed

exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h).

When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is

exceeded again, the automatic

functioning is reactivated.

04126S0020EM

Multifunction Lever

If the multifunction lever is pushed again

with the Automatic High Beam

Headlights activated, the function

deactivates.

This feature can also be deactivated by

rotating the headlight switch to the

position.

Note: If the system recognizes heavy

traffic areas, the automatic functions

remain disabled independently of the

vehicle’s speed.

Turn Signals

To activate the turn signals, move the

multifunction lever, located on the left

side of the steering wheel, up or down

until it reaches the detent. Moving the

lever upward flashes the right turn signal

and moving the lever downward will flash

the left turn signal.

The

or turn signal will blink on the

instrument panel.

The turn signals turn off automatically

when the vehicle is brought back onto a

straight course.

“Lane Change” Function

Tap the lever up or down once, without

moving beyond the detent, and the turn

signal (right or left) will flash five times.

Then, the turn signal (right or left) will

automatically turn off.

To turn off the flashing before the end of

the cycle, move the lever in the opposite

direction until the first click (about half

way).

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Front Map Reading Lights

The front map/reading and overhead

lights are mounted in the overhead

console. Each light can be turned on by

pushing the corresponding switch on the

console. These switches are backlit for

night time visibility. To turn the lights off,

push the switch a second time.

Note: Before exiting the vehicle, ensure

that the overhead lights are off. This will

prevent the battery from discharging

once the doors are closed. If a light is left

on accidently, the overhead lights will

turn off automatically approximately

15 minutes after the engine has been

cycled OFF.

Overhead Light Timing

On certain models, to assist getting in

and out of the vehicle at night or in

poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have

been provided.

Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle

— The overhead lights turn on according

to the following modes:

Will illuminate for a few seconds when

the doors are unlocked.

Will illuminate for approximately three

minutes when one of the doors is opened.

Will illuminate for a few seconds when

the doors are locked.

Timing is interrupted when the ignition is

cycled to ON mode.

04136S0001EM

Overhead Console

1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch

2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch

3 — Overhead Lights Switch

4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When

Doors Open

5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light

Switch

6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light

7 — Center Reading/Map Light

8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Three Modes Are Available For Turning

Off Overhead Lighting:

When all doors are closed after

entering the vehicle, the three-minute

timer will stop and a seconds timer will

start for the interior lights. This timing

will stop when the ignition is cycled to ON

mode.

When doors are locked (either with key

fob or with key inserted on driver side

door), the overhead light turns off.

The interior lights will turn off after

15 minutes to preserve the battery.

Timing While Getting Out Of The

Vehicle — After cycling the ignition to

STOP mode, the overhead lights will turn

on as follows:

For a few seconds after the engine

stops.

For approximately three minutes when

one of the doors is opened.

For a few seconds when the last door

is closed.

The timing stops automatically when the

doors are locked.

Vanity Mirror Lights — If Equipped

On the driver and passenger sun visor,

there is a light that illuminates the sun

visor mirror when the sun visor is folded

down and the mirror cover is lifted.

The courtesy light turns on automatically

by lifting the cover.

Glove Compartment Light

This light turns on automatically when the

glove compartment is opened and turns

off when it is closed.

The light turns on and off regardless of

the ignition status.

Interior Ambient Lighting

The brightness of the interior passenger

compartment lights can be adjusted

through the Information and

Entertainment System.

To access the adjustment function, on the

main menu select the following items in

sequence:

1. "Settings."

2. "Interior Ambient Lighting."

3. "Lights."

The lights can be adjusted to seven

different levels of brightness.

Door Light

This vehicle is equipped with courtesy

door light that illuminate the entry for the

driver or passenger when the door is

opened, and turns off when it is closed.

The light turns on and off regardless of

the ignition status.

0403132211US

Lift For Sun Visor Mirror

04136V0003EM

Glove Compartment Light

04136V0007EM

Courtesy Door Light

On vehicles equipped with a "Passive

Entry" system, another light can be found

under each exterior door handle.

Rear Overhead Light

The rear overhead lights are activated or

deactivated by on/off switches located

on the front overhead console or within

the rear overhead lights themselves.

The light turns on when a door is opened.

Note: The light will turn off

automatically after a few minutes if a

door is left open. To turn it on again, open

another door or close and reopen the

same door.

Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights

The luggage compartment features two

courtesy lights.

These courtesy lights turn on

automatically when the liftgate is opened

and turn off when it is closed.

The courtesy lights will turn on and off

regardless of the ignition position.

Note: If the liftgate is left open, the

lights will automatically turn off after

15 minutes to prevent discharging of the

battery.

04136S0005EM

Exterior Door Handle Light

04136S0004EM

Rear Overhead Light

1 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light

2 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light

3 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light

Switch

4 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light

Switch

04136V0006EM

Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

With the daytime running lights or

headlights on, rotate the dimmer control

upward to increase the instrument panel

brightness and the control button icons.

Rotate the dimmer control downward to

decrease brightness.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Windshield Wiper Stalk

The windshield wiper stalk is located on

the right side of the steering wheel.

The windshield wipers will only operate

with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off when

driving through an automatic car wash.

Damage to the windshield wipers may result

if the wiper control is left in any position

other than off.

In cold weather, always turn off the wiper

switch and allow the wipers to return to the

“Park” position before turning off the

engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the

wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to

the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle

is restarted.

Always remove any buildup of snow that

prevents the windshield wiper blades from

returning to the off position. If the

windshield wiper control is turned off and

the blades cannot return to the off position,

damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Wiper/Washers

Operation: The switch on the wiper

stalk can be set to the following

positions:

Windshield Wiper Off.

Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.

High Sensitivity Rain Sensing.

Low Continuous Wiper Speed.

High Continuous Wiper Speed.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotating the switch to the

position

activates the first (low) level continuous

speed of the windshield wipers in manual

mode.

Rotating the switch to the

position

activates the second (high) level

continuous speed of the windshield

wipers in manual mode.

04126V0055EM

Dimmer Control

05036V0002EM

Windshield Wiper Switch

Rain Sensors

Rotating the switch to the

position,

activates the first, less sensitive level of

the Rain Sensing function.

Rotating the switch to the

position,

activates the second, more sensitive

level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer

to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more

information on how this system

functions.

Windshield Washer Operation

Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel

to operate the windshield washer.

Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the

windshield washer jet and the windshield

wiper with a single movement. The wipers

and washers will continue to operate until

stalk is released.

The windshield wiper stops working three

strokes after the stalk is released,

followed by a final stroke six seconds

later to complete the cycle.

Mist

Use this feature when weather

conditions make occasional usage of the

wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward

to the MIST position and release for a

single wiping cycle. This function is useful

to remove small deposits of dust from

the windshield or morning dew.

Note: This function does not activate the

windshield washer. To spray windshield

washer fluid onto the windshield, the

washing function must be used.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through the

windshield could lead to a collision. You

might not see other vehicles or other

obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the

windshield during freezing weather, warm

the windshield with the defroster before and

during windshield washer use.

Rain Sensor

The Rain Sensor is located behind the

interior rear view mirror. This feature

senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for

the driver.

The feature is especially useful for road

splash or over spray from the windshield

washers of the vehicle ahead.

The sensor has an adjustment range that

varies progressively from wiper still (no

stroke) when the windshield is dry, to

wiper at continuous speed (fast

operation) with intense rain.

Activation

Rotating the wiper switch to position

or activates the rain sensor.

The activation of the rain sensor system

is done by tapping the wiper stalk

upwards while the switch is in the

position.

The variation in sensitivity during rain

sensor operation is also signaled by a

stroke of the wiper (command acquired

and implemented). This stroke is also

executed with the windshield dry.

If the windshield washer is used with the

rain sensor activated, the normal washing

cycle is performed, after which the rain

sensor resumes its normal automatic

operation.

Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area

clean.

Deactivation

Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition

to STOP mode.

In the event of malfunction of the rain

sensor while it is active, the windshield

wiper operates intermittently at a speed

consistent with the sensitivity setting of

the rain sensor, whether or not there is

rain on the glass for as long as the sensor

failure is indicated on the display.

04146V0002EM

Rain Sensor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The sensor continues to operate and it is

possible to set the windshield wiper to

continuous mode

or .The failure

indication remains on for as long as the

sensor is active.

The rain sensor is able to recognize and

automatically adjust itself in the

presence of the following conditions:

Presence of dirt on the controlled

surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.).

Presence of streaks of water caused

by the worn window wiper blades.

Difference between day and night.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with

the windshield wiper operating, activates

a single cycle of the rear window wiper.

Activation of the rear window

wiper/washer can be done by moving the

stalk to one of the following positions:

Pushing the stalk towards the

instrument panel activates the rear

window washer (a brief push activates

one washing cycle, keeping the stalk

pushed washes continuously until the

stalk is released).

Pushing the stalk downward

activates/deactivates continuous rear

wiper operation.

HEADLAMP WASHERS — IF

EQUIPPED

The windshield wiper stalk operates the

headlight washers when the ignition is in

the ON position and the headlights are

turned on. The windshield wiper stalk is

located on the right side of the steering

column. To use the headlight washers, pull

the stalk toward you and release it. The

headlight washers will spray a timed

high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto

each headlight lens. In addition, the

windshield washers will spray the

windshield and the windshield wipers will

cycle.

CLIMATE CONTROL

Passenger Compartment Air Vents

Side Air Vents

To adjust the position of the Side Air

Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster

(2) in any direction.

Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2)

to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side

Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close

the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise

will open the vent.

04156V0002EM

Side Air Vents

1 — Fixed Side Air Vents

2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

Central Air Vents

To adjust the position of the Central

Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent

Adjuster (2) up or down.

Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow

Adjuster (4) to adjust the air flow.

Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow

Adjuster (4) up will open the vents,

allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it

down will close the vents.

Rear Air Vents

To adjust the position of the Rear Air

Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster

(2) in any direction.

Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2)

to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear

Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close

the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise

will open the vent.

04156V0003EM

Central Air Vents

1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents

2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster

3 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

4 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster

04156V0004EM

Rear Air Vents

1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents

2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

04156V0005EM

Automatic Climate Control System

1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment

Knob

6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button —

If Equipped

2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto-

matic Operation)

7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution

Selection Button

12 — Air Conditioning Button

3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec-

tion Button

8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au-

tomatic Operation)

13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button —

If Equipped

4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — PassengerTemperature Adjust-

ment Knob

14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button

— If Equipped

5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature

Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

15 — Air Recirculation Button

Caution!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which

does not pollute the environment in the

event of accidental leakage. Under no

circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids,

which are incompatible with the components

of this system.

Description

The Automatic Dual Zone Climate

Control System adjusts the temperature

and air distribution independently

between the driver and passenger.

The system maintains the set

temperature inside the passenger

compartment and compensates for

outside temperature change.

Note: The reference temperature is 72

°F (22 °C) for optimal comfort

management.

The automatic setting will adjust the

following to maintain comfort within the

passenger compartment:

Air temperature from the driver/front

passenger side vents

Air distribution from the driver/front

passenger side vents

Fan speed (continuous variation of the

air flow)

Compressor variations (for

cooling/dehumidifying the air)

Air recirculation

The Climate Control System can also be

operated manually by using the buttons

and knobs on the faceplate.

Manual selections will override the

automatic settings, which are stored until

the AUTO button is pushed. If the system

intervenes for safety reasons, the

automatic setting will take control of the

system.

The below operations will not deactivate

the automatic (AUTO) function:

Air Recirculation activation/

deactivation

A/C activation/deactivation

SYNC function activation

Rear Window Defrost activation/

deactivation

When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s

internal temperature is controlled

according to the set temperature.

The following can be manually set or

adjusted:

Driver/passenger air temperature

Blower speed (continuous variation)

Air distribution (seven positions for

driver and passenger)

A/C activation

Front Defroster

Air recirculation

Rear Defroster

System deactivation

Operating Mode

The Climate Control system can be

activated in different ways. It is

recommended to use the automatic

function. Push the AUTO button and set

the desired temperatures.

The automatic system adjusts the

temperature, quantity, and distribution

of air introduced into the passenger

compartment. It also controls air

recirculation and the activation of the air

conditioner.

At any time during automatic operation,

you can change the temperature, activate

or deactivate the Rear Defroster,

activate SYNC, activate or deactivate

the air conditioner, and activate or

deactivate air recirculation. The system

will automatically adjust to the new

settings.

Climate Control Display Settings

The Climate Control settings are visible

on the Information and Entertainment

System radio screen.

The display on the Information and

Entertainment System is a pop up

window (1), which is activated by pushing

the buttons or turning the knobs on the

Climate Control system. The indicator

lights located on the buttons and knobs

indicate that the selected feature is

on/off. If no operation is performed for a

predetermined time, the pop-up will close

on the display.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Air Temperature Adjustment

Rotate the driver or passenger

Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise

for warmer temperatures or

counterclockwise for cooler

temperatures. The set temperatures are

shown on the Information and

Entertainment System.

Push the SYNC button to sync the driver

and passenger air temperatures.

Rotate the passenger Temperature

Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC

function. This will set a new passenger

side temperature.

Rotate the Temperature Adjustment

Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI

(maximum heating) setting or fully

counterclockwise to engage the LO

(maximum cooling) setting.

To deactivate these functions, rotate the

Temperature Adjustment Knob to the

desired temperature.

Rear passengers’ temperature is linked

to driver side selection.

Air Distribution Selection

Push the Air Distribution Selection

button on the faceplate to change the

mode of air distribution. The follow

selectable option are explained below:

Air flow to the windshield and

demister window vents to

demist/defrost them.

Air flow at the central and side

dashboard vents to ventilate the

chest and the face.

Air flow to the front and rear floor

vents. This setting heats the

passenger compartment the

quickest.

Air flow distributed between the

floor vents (hotter air) and the

central and side dashboard vents

(cooler air). This air distribution

setting is useful on sunny days

during spring and autumn.

Air flow distributed between the

floor vents, windshield, and front

side window defrosting/demisting

vents. This distribution setting

warms the passenger compartment

while preventing the windows from

fogging up.

Air flow distribution between the

windshield demisting/defrosting

vents, and side/central dashboard

vents. This distribution setting

sends air to the windshield in sunny

conditions.

Air flow distribution to all vents on

the vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls

automatically manage the air

distribution. When set manually, the

respective symbols on the Information

and Entertainment System indicate the

air distribution setting.

Fan Speed Adjustment

Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase

or decrease the blower speed. The speed

is displayed with lighted indicators in the

Information and Entertainment System

display.

Maximum fan speed = all indicators

illuminated on the Information and

Entertainment System display

0521128655US

Climate Control Display Settings

1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display

Minimum fan speed = one indicator

illuminated on the Information and

Entertainment System display

The fan can be turned off by rotating the

Blower Speed Knob clockwise to position

O (all segments on the Information and

Entertainment System display are turned

off).

Note: To restore automatic control of

the fan speed, push the AUTO button.

AUTO Button

When the AUTO button is pushed

(indicator illuminated), the Climate

Control system automatically adjusts the

following settings:

Quantity and distribution of air flow in

the passenger compartment

The air conditioner

Air recirculation

Cancels any manual settings

Selecting the AUTO function illuminates

the indicator on the A/C button.

If air distribution or the fan speed is

manual adjusted, the AUTO button

indicator will turn off to indicate that the

Climate Control system is no longer in

AUTO mode.

After a manual adjustment, push the

AUTO button to resume the automatic

system.

SYNC Button

Push the SYNC button (indicator

illuminated) to sync the passenger side

air temperature with the driver side air

temperature.

This function makes temperature

regulation easier when the driver is

traveling alone.

Turn the passenger Temperature

Adjustment Knob or push the passenger

side Air Distribution Selection Button to

change the passenger side air

temperature and return to separate air

temperature management.

Air Recirculation And Air Quality

System (AQS)

Air Recirculation is managed according to

the following operating mode:

Automatic engagement: indicator is

illuminated above the “A” on the Air

Recirculation Button

Forced activation (air circulation

always activated): indicator illuminated

above the

icon on the Air

Recirculation Button

Forced deactivation (air recirculation

always off with intake of outside air):

both indicators not illuminated on the Air

Recirculation Button

The three operating conditions are

obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation

Button

in sequence.

Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS)

Function — If Equipped

When the automatic recirculation

function is selected, the AQS function

automatically activates internal air

recirculation when the outside air is

polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).

At low external temperatures or in high

humidity, the automatic function turns

off to avoid fogging up the windows. The

user can select the function again by

pushing the Air Recirculation Button.

In automatic operation, air recirculation

will be controlled by the system

according to outside environmental

conditions.

Note:

With the AQS function active and

after the internal air recirculation

system has been functioning for a set

amount of time, the Climate Control

System enables air intake to cycle the

air in the passenger compartment for a

set time. The AQS function is disabled

during the air changes.

The engagement of the recirculation

system makes it possible to reach the

required heating or cooling conditions

faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use

it on rainy/cold days as it can increase

the possibility of the windows fogging.

When the outside temperature is low,

recirculation is forced off to prevent the

windows from fogging up.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

A/C Compressor

Push the A/C button or the icon to

activate or deactivate the A/C

compressor (indicator illuminated when

activated). The A/C compressor will

remain off even after the engine has

stopped.

When the A/C compressor is turned off,

the system deactivates air recirculation

to prevent the windows from fogging up.

If the climate control system can

maintain the temperature, with the A/C

turned off, the AUTO feature will remain

on and the AUTO button indicator light

will not switch off.

To restore automatic control of the A/C

compressor, push the A/C button or the

icon or the AUTO button. With the A/C

compressor off, the air speed can be set

manually using the Air Speed Adjustment

Knob.

When the A/C compressor is on, and the

engine is running, air speed cannot be

lower than the minimum speed (only one

indicator light is lit).

Note: When the A/C is off, the Climate

Control system can not produce air that

is colder than the current outside

temperature. Under certain

environmental conditions, windows could

fog up rapidly since the air is not

dehumidified.

Front Defroster And MAX-DEF

Function

Push the Front Defroster button

(indicator illuminated) to defrost the

windshield and side windows.

While in MAX-DEF function, the air

conditioner will:

Activate the air conditioner

compressor when the weather allows

Turn air recirculation off

Set the maximum air temperature (HI)

on both the driver and passenger side

Activate a blower speed based on the

temperature of the engine coolant

Adjust the air flow towards the

windshield and front side windows

Activate the Rear Window Defroster

Display the fan speed (indicators

illuminated) and current air distribution

setting

Note: The MAX-DEF function remains

active for approximately three minutes

once the engine coolant reaches the

proper temperature.

When the function is on, AUTO mode will

deactivate. The only manual operations

possible are adjusting blower speed and

turning off the Rear Window Defroster.

Pushing the

button switches off the

MAX-DEF function.

Rear Defroster

Push the Rear Defroster button to

activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear

Defroster.

The Rear Defroster will turn off after

20 minutes or once the engine is turned

off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push

the Rear Defroster

button.

Note: To avoid damage, do not apply

stickers over the interior heating

filaments of the Rear Defroster.

Humidity Sensor

The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the

windows from fogging up. The AUTO

function (indicator illuminated) must be

on for the Humidity Sensor to function.

When outside temperature is low, the

system may turn the compressor on and

turn air recirculation off for safer driving.

Switching Off/On The Climate Control

System

Switching Off The Climate Control

System

Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob

completely counterclockwise to turn off

the Climate Control System.

With the air conditioner off:

Air recirculation is on

The A/C compressor is off

The fan is off

The heated rear window can be

activated/deactivated

Note: The climate control system stores

the previously set temperatures and

resumes operation when any button on

the system is pushed.

Switching On The Climate Control

System

To switch the climate control system on

in automatic mode, push the AUTO

button.

Stop/Start

The Stop/Start system shuts off the

engine when vehicle speed is 0 mph

(0 km/h), and the climate control system

will continue to maintain comfort within

the vehicle.

Stop/Start will deactivate in the

following scenarios:

The climate control system is in AUTO

mode (indicator illuminated), and the

vehicle has yet to reach the set

temperature

The climate control system is in LO

maximum cooling

The climate control system is in HI

maximum heating

The climate control system is in the

MAX-DEF status

When the Stop/Start system is active,

the engine will restart if the inside

temperature changes significantly, or if

the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is

activated.

With Stop/Start system on, air flow is

reduced to keep the compartment

comfort conditions for longer.

Until the temperature drastically

changes within the cabin, the climate

control system will continue to maintain

the temperature while the engine is off.

By deactivating the Stop/Start system

with the

button located on the

dashboard, the climate control system

will take priority over the engine shutting

off.

Note:

In harsh climate conditions, limit the

use of the Stop/Start system to prevent

the compressor from continuously

switching on and off. This will cause

rapid misting of the windows and the

accumulation of humidity in the

passenger compartment.

When the Stop/Start system is on,

the climate control system will always

take air in from outside, reducing the

probability of the windows fogging up.

System Maintenance

In winter, the Climate Control System

must be turned on at least once a month

for approximately ten minutes.

Have the system inspected at an

authorized dealer before the summer.

POWER WINDOWS

Power Window Switches

The power window switches work with

the ignition in the ON position and for

three minutes after the ignition has been

placed in the STOP position. When one of

the front doors is opened, this operation

is disabled.

Driver Side Front Door Controls

The switches are located on the door

panel trim. All windows can be controlled

from the driver side door panel.

04166V0001EM

Power Window Switches

1 — Front Left Window Switch

2 — Front Right Window Switch

3 — Rear Right Window Switch

4 — Window Lockout Switch

5 — Rear Left Window Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Window Opening

Push the buttons to open the desired

window.

Each button has two position steps.

Press gently (first position step) for

manual "burst" window travel, while

pressing the same button harder (second

position step) activates "continuous

automatic" operation.

If the button is pressed again, the window

will stop in the desired position.

Window Closing

Pull the window to the first detent to

move the window upward. Pull the

window to the second detent, and the

window will go up automatically.

To Stop the window during Auto-UP

operation, push the window switch.

Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door

Controls

There are single window controls on the

passenger and rear door trim panels

which operate the door windows.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch

Protection

The vehicle may be equipped with an

anti-pinch safety device for closing the

windows.

If the safety system senses any obstacle

while the window is closing, it will stop

the window’s movement and reverse it,

depending on its position.

This device is also useful if the windows

are activated accidentally by children on

board the vehicle.

The anti-pinch safety function is

activated both during the manual and the

automatic operation of the window.

When the anti-pinch system is activated,

the window closing is immediately

interrupted. Then the window closing is

automatically reversed and the window

lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in

relation to the first stop position. The

window cannot be operated during this

time.

Note: In the event of an error, or if the

anti-pinch protection is activated three

consecutive times, the automatic closing

operation of the window will be

deactivated. In order to restore the

correct operation of the system, the

window must be lowered.

Power Window System Initialization

If power supply is interrupted, the

electric window automatic operation

must be re-initialized.

To perform the initialization procedure,

which must be done on each door with the

doors closed, manually fully close the

window to be initialized.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,

and do not let children play with power

windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near

the vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. Occupants, particularly unattended

children, can become entrapped by the

windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

POWER SUNROOF — IF

EQUIPPED

Power Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of a single

glass panel and is fitted with a power

sunshade the full length of the panel.

Operation of the sunroof is only possible

with the ignition in ON mode. Refer to

“Ignition System” in this chapter for

further information.

The sunroof has three preset positions:

Fully closed.

Comfort (intermediate opening).

Fully open.

Note: You cannot have the sunshade

closed when the sunroof is open.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle, or with access to an unlocked

vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near

the vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. Do not leave the ignition of a

vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the

ON mode. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become entrapped

by the power sunroof while operating the

power sunroof switch. Such entrapment

may result in serious injury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk of

being thrown from a vehicle with an open

sunroof. You could also be seriously injured

or killed. Always fasten your seat belt

properly and make sure all passengers are

also properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operate the

sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other

body parts, or any object, to project through

the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening

To open the sunroof’s front panel, push

the open/close button toward the rear of

the vehicle to open to the comfort

position (half way). Pushing the button a

second time will open to the fully open

position.

The automatic motion can be interrupted

in any position by pushing the open/close

button again.

Caution!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or

crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun

roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may

damage it.

Closing

From the complete open position, push

the open/close button toward the front

of the vehicle. The roof will close

completely.

The automatic motion can be interrupted

in any position by pushing the open/close

button again.

Vent Opening

To bring the roof into vent position, push

and release the vent button.

This type of vent opening can be

activated regardless of the position of

the sunroof. When starting with the roof

in the closed position, pushing the vent

button automatically causes the sunroof

to open to the vent position. If the roof is

already open, the button must be held

until the roof reaches the vent-opening

position.

Pushing the vent button again during

automatic movement of the roof will stop

it.

04186S0001EM

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

1 — Power Shade Open/Close

2 — Sunroof Open/Close Button

3 — Vent Open/Close

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Sun Shade

The sunshade is power operated.

Push the Power Shade open/close button

toward the rear of the vehicle to open the

sun shade.

Push the Power Shade open/close button

toward the front of the vehicle to close

the sun shade.

The automatic motion can be interrupted

in any position by pushing the Power

Shade on/off button again.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety

system capable of detecting the

presence of an obstacle during the

closing movement. If an obstacle is

detected, the system intervenes and the

movement of the sunroof is immediately

reversed into opening.

Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroof must

be initialized again in case of faulty

sunroof operation. It may also be

necessary to initialize the sunroof after

the vehicle’s battery as been

disconnected and then reconnected.

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the open/close button to bring

the roof into the completely closed

position.

2. Cycle the ignition to STOP mode and

wait at least ten seconds.

3. Cycle the ignition to AVV mode. Refer

to “Ignition System” in this chapter for

further information.

4. Hold the open/close button down for

at least ten seconds. You should then

hear the mechanical stop of the roof

motor.

5. Within five seconds, hold the

open/close button down. The roof will

perform a complete opening and closing

cycle (to indicate that the initialization

procedure has been successful). If this

does not occur, the procedure must be

restarted from the beginning.

HOOD

Opening The Hood

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on the

driver’s side kick panel.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and

position yourself in front of the grille.

3. Lift the hood slightly.

04196V0001EM

Hood Release Lever

4. Move the under-hood latch from right

to left to release the hood.

5. Raise the hood completely. The

operation is assisted by the addition of

two gas props which hold it in the open

position.

Note:

Use both hands to lift the hood.

Before lifting, check that the windshield

wiper arms are not raised from the

windshield or in operation. Also, ensure

that the vehicle is stationary and that

the electric park brake is engaged.

Do not tamper with the props.

Assist the hood while lifting it.

Closing The Hood

To close, lower the hood to

approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from

the engine compartment then let it drop.

Make sure that the hood is completely

closed and fully latched. Do this by trying

to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do

not try to push the hood lid down, but

open it and repeat the procedure.

Note: Always check that the hood is

closed correctly to prevent it from

opening while the vehicle is travelling.

Since the hood is equipped with a double

locking system, one for each side, you

must check that it is closed on each side.

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before

driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully

latched, it could open when the vehicle is in

motion and block your vision. Failure to

follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

POWER LIFTGATE

Unlocking of the liftgate is electrically

operated and is deactivated when the

vehicle is in motion.

If anything obstructs the power liftgate

while it is closing or opening, the liftgate

will automatically reverse to the closed

or open position, provided it meets

sufficient resistance.

The liftgate height is adjustable to avoid

difficulties in tight spaces. To customize

the liftgate opening position, proceed as

follows:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Manually move the liftgate to the

desired position.

3. Push one of the closing buttons for at

least five seconds (successful

programming is indicated by the turn

signals flashing three times).

The liftgate is now programmed to open

to the set position.

This function can be selected on the

Information and Entertainment System.

To set the liftgate opening height, refer

to the Information and Entertainment

System Owner’s Manual Supplement for

further information.

04196V0002EM

Hood Latch Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Opening

Opening From The Outside

When unlocked, the liftgate can be

opened from outside the vehicle by

pushing the external liftgate release

switch. Push the switch until you hear a

“click.”

The liftgate can also be opened by

quickly pushing the external liftgate

release button on the key fob twice.

The turn signal indicators will blink and

the interior lights will turn on when the

liftgate is opened. They turn off

automatically when the liftgate is closed.

The lights turn off automatically after a

few minutes if the liftgate is left open.

Opening From The Inside

When the liftgate is locked, it can be

opened from inside the vehicle by lifting

the interior liftgate release button on the

driver’s door panel trim.

Note: A signal will chime while the

liftgate is opening or closing.

You can stop the liftgate from moving by

pushing the interior liftgate release

button again.

Liftgate Emergency Opening

There is a panel on the luggage

compartment interior trim, next to the

liftgate lock, accessible by folding down

the rear seat backrest, which allows

access to the manual lock release.

Pull to release the lock.

The liftgate can now be opened manually.

Closing

Closing From Outside

It is possible to close the liftgate by

pushing:

The power liftgate switch.

04056V0005EM

External Liftgate Release Switch

04206V0002EM

Interior Liftgate Release

1 — Interior Liftgate Release Switch

04206V0014EM

Manual Lock Release Location

0318134894US

Manual Lock Release Cord

The power lock switch located on the

liftgate (all the doors, including the

liftgate, will be locked).

The liftgate button on the key fob

twice.

The Passive Entry liftgate switch on

the liftgate.

Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate

from moving with any of the Power

Liftgate switches.

Closing From Inside

Push the power liftgate switch on the

driver’s door panel trim and hold until the

operation is complete.

Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate

from moving by releasing the switch.

Customizing The Liftgate Opening

Height

To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you

can set the height at which the liftgate

opens to.

To customize the liftgate opening

position, follow the steps below:

1. Open the liftgate manually and move

it to the position that you want the

liftgate to open to.

2. Press and hold one of the closing

buttons for at least five seconds

(successful acquisition is indicated by the

turn signals flashing three times).

The liftgate is now programmed to open

to the set position.

Hands Free Liftgate — If Equipped

To operate the Hands Free Liftgate

System:

1. If the doors are locked, the system

must detect the electronic key near the

liftgate.

2. If the doors are unlocked, the system

does not have to detect the electronic

key near the liftgate.

3. Go to the rear of the vehicle, in the

center and about 3 feet (1 m) from the

liftgate.

4. Move your foot under the bumper,

simulating a kick. When you have

completed this movement, withdraw your

leg. To activate the liftgate, both sensors

must detect your leg.

If it is closed, the Hands Free Liftgate

unlocks and opens completely, and with

another movement of the foot, it stops. A

further movement of the foot reverses

the direction and closes the liftgate

completely, if you do not stop it again.

If it is open, with a movement of the foot,

the Hands Free Liftgate closes

completely, and with another movement

of the foot, it stops. If the liftgate is

stopped, another movement of the foot

will reverse the direction and open it

completely.

Note: To conserve the battery charge,

avoid performing this operation

repeatedly with the engine off.

04056V0055EM

Power Liftgate/Lock Switches

1 — Power Liftgate Switch

2 — Power Door Lock Switch

04206V0015EM

Hands Free Liftgate Activation Zone

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

You can activate/deactivate the Hands

Free Liftgate on the Information and

Entertainment System by pushing the

MENU button to select the Main menu,

and selecting the following items:

1. Settings

2. Doors And Locks

3. Automatic Liftgate Opening Select

them by turning the Rotary Pad and

pushing it.

Warning!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow

poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.

You and your passengers could be injured by

these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when

you are operating the vehicle.

If you are required to drive with the

liftgate open, make sure that all windows

are closed, and the climate control blower

switch is set at high speed. Do not use the

recirculation mode.

Warning!

During power operation, personal injury or

cargo damage may occur. Ensure the

liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the

liftgate is closed and latched before driving

away.

Liftgate Initialization

Note: Automatic operation of the

liftgate must be initialized again in case

of faulty liftgate operation. Proceed as

follows:

1. Close all the doors and the liftgate.

2. Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. Push the unlock button on the key fob.

Cargo Area Features

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

The Retractable Cargo Area Cover can be

rolled up and removed.

To Use The Cargo Area Cover:

1. From the rolled up (retracted)

position, hold the handle and pull the

cover outward toward the rear of the

vehicle.

2. Then assist the cover pins into the

slots located just inside the liftgate

opening.

Removing The Cover:

1. Retract the cover by pulling the

handle slightly rearward to release the

cover pins.

2. Guide the cover forward until it is fully

retracted.

04206V0016EM

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

1 — Handle

2 — Cover Pins

3. Pull the two cover hooks (one on each

side) towards the inside of the cargo

area. Then lift the cover up and remove it.

Warning!

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the

vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around

in a sudden stop and strike someone in the

vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the

cargo floor or in the passenger

compartment. Remove the cover from the

vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not

store it in the vehicle.

To Access The Tire Service Kit — If

Equipped

To access the "Tire Service Kit" (for its

use, refer to "In Case Of Emergency"),

proceed as follows:

Lift up the load floor by the handle.

Cargo Area Anchors

The cargo area floor may be equipped

with fixed or mobile anchoring loops that

allows you to anchor and secure luggage

safely.

The fixed anchor loops are located in the

four corners of the cargo floor.

Grocery Hooks

Two hooks (one on the left side and one

on the right side) are also available on the

side panels to fix loads that are not

excessively heavy (e.g. bags).

Note: Do not apply a load greater than

22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.

04206V0017EM

Cover Attached

3 — Cover Hook

04206V0004EM

Load Floor

04206V0005EM

Anchor Loops

04206V0009EM

Grocery Hook

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Cargo Area Adjustable Rail — If

Equipped

The mobile loops (if equipped), slide on

two guides secured to the cargo area

floor.

To position a loop, push down the center

button while sliding the loop along the

guide to the desired position. Release the

button and move the loop slightly to the

next fixed position in the notches on the

guide.

Lift the loop to fasten the load.

Cargo Net — If Equipped

Cargo nets can be used to contain

lightweight materials during transport.

The cargo net is included in the optional

“Convenience Package” and also available

from your authorized dealer.

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Glove Compartment

To open the glove compartment proceed

as follows:

1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the

glove compartment by placing the

emergency key into the lock on the

handle.

2. Pull the handle to open the glove

compartment.

When the glove compartment is opened,

a light turns on to illuminate the inside of

the compartment.

Note: Do not insert large objects that

prevent the glove compartment from

closing completely. Always make sure

that the glove compartment is

completely closed when driving.

04206V0011EM

Adjustable Anchor Loop — If Equipped

04206V0012EM

Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop To Use

04246V0001EM

Opening The Glove Compartment

Sun Visors

The sun visors are located at the sides of

the interior rear view mirror. They can be

adjusted forward and sideways.

To direct the visor toward the passenger

side window, detach the visor from the

interior rear view mirror side hook and

turn it towards the side window.

From this position, the sun visor can also

be extended toward the rear of the

vehicle for additional blockage of

sunlight.

Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on

the back of the sun visors and can be

used even in poor light conditions.

Note: A rear facing child restraint

system should never be fitted in the front

passenger seat. Always comply with the

instructions on the sun visor. Refer to

"Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more

information.

Homelink

Description

Homelink is a fixed system installed on

the vehicle. It can sync up to three

different devices that activate garage

doors, gates, lighting systems, and home

or office alarm systems.

Programming

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon

monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your

vehicle in the garage while programming the

transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious

injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will open and

close while you are programming the

universal transceiver. Do not program the

transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener

that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This

includes most garage door opener models

manufactured after 1982. Do not use a

garage door opener without these safety

features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,

on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

Note: Without starting the engine,

activate the electric park brake and place

the ignition in the ON position.

The following operation will delete the

manufacture’s standard codes and does

not need to be repeated during the

subsequent button programming:

Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and

3). After about ten seconds, the lighted

indicators will start to flash. Release both

buttons.

Note: Follow the steps below to begin

programming your remote control to one

of the HomeLink buttons:

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink

button (1, 2 or 3).

0403132210US

Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger

Window

04246S0006NA

Garage Door Opener (Homelink)

Buttons

1 — Homelink Button 1

2 — Homelink Button 2

3 — Homelink Button 3

4 — Homelink Indicator

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

When the HomeLink indicator begins to

flash slowly, move the portable remote

control one to three inches from the

HomeLink system (keeping the

programmable button pushed down).

2. If the indicator does not begin to flash

quickly, change the distance between the

HomeLink and the portable remote

control and try the procedure again.

3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first

slowly and then quickly. When the

indicator starts to flash quickly, release

both buttons.

Using The Homelink System

The HomeLink system activates the

garage door or gate motor, just like the

portable remote control. The vehicle

must be within the range of the garage

door and the ignition must be in the ON

position.

Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3).

While the signal is being transmitted, the

indicator is lit and the system (garage

door, gate, etc.) will respond.

If the HomeLink system does not

operate, the original portable remote

control may be equipped with an

alternative code (refer to “Alternative

Code Synchronization”).

If necessary, the original remote control

can still be used to operate the system.

Alternative Code Synchronization

To check whether the garage door or gate

motor has an alternative code, proceed

as follows:

1. Read the garage door or gate motor

manufacturer manual.

2. The portable remote control seems to

have programmed to the HomeLink

system, but the garage door or gate can

be neither opened or closed.

3. Push the programmed button and

keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an

alternative code system, the indicator

flashes briefly, and then remains off for

two seconds. This sequence is repeated

for 20 seconds.

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon

monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your

vehicle in the garage while programming the

transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious

injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will open and

close while you are programming the

universal transceiver. Do not program the

transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener

that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This

includes most garage door opener models

manufactured after 1982. Do not use a

garage door opener without these safety

features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,

on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

Note: To program Homelink using an

Alternative Code, the vehicle must be

within range of the garage door. Activate

the electric park brake and turn the

ignition to ON, without starting the

engine.

Proceed as follows:

1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on

the garage door or gate motor. The color

and position may vary depending on the

manufacturer (consult the garage door or

gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train”

button (this normally activates the

setting warning light).

2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1,

2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator

begins to flash slowly, move the portable

remote control one to three inches from

the HomeLink system (keeping the

programmable button pushed down).

3. Within 30 seconds, push the

programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it.

Push the programmed button a second

time and release it to conclude the

operation. For some motors, the

operation will probably have to be

repeated a third time to end the setting.

The motor should now be capable of

recognizing the signal transmitted by

HomeLink and then open/close the door

or gate.

Programming A Single Key

It is possible to program another original

remote control on an already

programmed HomeLink key by canceling

the previously stored frequency.

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon

monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your

vehicle in the garage while programming the

transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious

injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will open and

close while you are programming the

universal transceiver. Do not program the

transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener

that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This

includes most garage door opener models

manufactured after 1982. Do not use a

garage door opener without these safety

features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,

on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

Note: Activate the electric park brake

and place the ignition to ON without

starting the engine.

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the desired HomeLink button

and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not

release the button until the last

operation has been performed.

2. When the HomeLink indicator begins

to flash slowly, move the portable remote

control 1 to 3 inches from the system

(keeping the programmable button

pressed down).

If the indicator does not begin to flash

quickly, change the distance between the

HomeLink and the portable remote

control and try the procedure again.

The HomeLink indicator flashes, first

slowly and then quickly. When the

indicator starts to flash quickly, release

both buttons on the remote control.

The system previously programmed to

HomeLink has now been deleted and the

new system is ready to use. This does not

affect the other two HomeLink buttons in

any way.

Deleting Programmed Keys

It is recommended to delete HomeLink

programming before selling the vehicle.

All three keys are deleted

simultaneously.

Proceed as follows:

1. Push and hold the outer buttons

(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the

indicator will start to flash.

2. Release both keys.

Technical Information For After Sales

Service

If you are unable to set up HomeLink

successfully after following the above

instructions, contact After Sales Service

(HomeLink free hotline number

1-800-355-3515 ) with the following

information:

Vehicle make and model, including

manufacturing year and country of

purchase;

Make, model, age and frequency of use

of the original portable remote control (if

known).

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Outlets

The Instrument Panel Power Outlet is

located under the air conditioning control

panel. It will only operate when the

ignition is ON.

Note: Do not connect devices, with a

power rating higher than 180 W, to the

outlet. Do not use power adaptors that

do not fit the outlet as this may damage

it.

Luggage Compartment Power Outlet

The Luggage Compartment Power Outlet

is located on the left side of the luggage

compartment and only works with the

ignition device in the ON position.

Note: Do not connect devices with

powers higher than 150 W to the socket.

Do not damage the outlet by using

unsuitable adaptors.

115 Volt Power Inverter — If Equipped

The Power Inverter is located on the right

side of the luggage compartment. It can

be used for small battery-powered

electrical appliances with powers up to

150 W (e.g. cameras, video camera,

tablets, razors, etc.)

Note: Do not connect devices with

powers higher than 150 W to the socket.

Do not damage the socket by using

unsuitable adaptors.

Front Armrest

The center console storage compartment

is located between the front seats.

To access the center console storage, lift

the upper part of the center console as

shown below.

Warning!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console

compartment lid in the open position. Driving

with the console compartment lid open may

result in injury in a collision.

0313132162US

Instrument Panel Power Outlet

04206V0010EM

Luggage Compartment Power Outlet

04206V0013EM

Power Inverter

04246V0004EM

Center Console

Cupholder

Two cupholders are available in the

center console.

To access the cupholders, slide the cover

forward. To close the compartment, push

the cover and it will close automatically.

Rear Armrest

The rear armrest is foldable and can be

stored in the backrest.

To lower the armrest, pull on the tab

located at the top of the seatback and

fold it downward.

To re-close the armrest, lift it until it is

inserted into the backrest.

There are two cupholders and a phone

compartment inside the armrest.

Note: The armrest was not designed to

support the weight of an adult passenger

or a child. Only use it to hold drinks or

small objects.

04246V0005EM

Cupholders In Center Console

04246V0018EM

Rear Cupholder

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information

you need to understand and use

the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .68

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .69

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON

THE INSTRUMENT PANEL........74

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .94

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ......94

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

Inside the tachometer there is a light

sensor capable of detecting ambient light

conditions and adjusting the operating

mode (night/day) and the brightness of

the instrument panel and the Information

and Entertainment System display.

2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

The digital bar indicator monitors the

temperature of the engine oil and starts

supplying indications when the fluid

temperature reaches approximately

122°F (50°C).

Under normal usage, the digital scale

should hover around the middle of the

scale according to the working

conditions.

05026S0005EM

Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.

You or others could be badly burned by

steam or boiling coolant. You may want to

call an authorized dealer for service if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under

the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the

Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

Caution!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system

could damage your vehicle. If the

temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and

stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air

conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off

immediately and call an authorized dealer

for service.

3. Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display

features a driver-interactive display.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

4. Fuel Gauge

The digital bar gauge shows the

amount of fuel in the tank.

The warning light turns on, a

message is displayed and there is an

acoustic signal when about 2.4 gallons

(9 liters) of fuel are left in the tank.

The fuel pump symbol points to the

side of the vehicle where the fuel door is

located.

Note: If the low fuel warning light

switches on, refuel at the earliest

opportunity.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

Note: The hard telltales will illuminate

for a bulb check when the ignition is first

cycled.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY

Instrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a

driver-interactive display that is located

in the instrument cluster.

When one or more of the doors have been

opened or closed and the ignition is in the

OFF position, the instrument cluster will

display the vehicle mileage for a few

seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure

indications.

05036S0001QV

Instrument Cluster Display

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Reconfigurable Display Items

1. Headlight Warning Lights

Displays the headlight warning light for

either of the following active modes:

Headlights

Automatic Headlights

2. Gear Selector Information

Displays the following information

controlled by the gear selector function:

P = PARK

R = REVERSE

N = NEUTRAL

D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)

AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in

manual (sequential) driving mode –

shifting to lower gear in sequential

driving mode

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure,

Cruise Control

Displays operations for the following

modes:

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise

Control (ACC) (if equipped)

4. Speed Limit Warning Light

Shows information regarding the Speed

Limiter function.

5. Compass

6. Reconfigurable Main Area

Can display the following screens:

Home

Trip A

Trip B (can be activated/deactivated

through the Information and

Entertainment System)

Performance

The screens can be selected, on rotation,

by pushing the MENU selection button on

the windshield wiper stalk.

Depending on the driving mode chosen

using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural,

and Advanced Efficiency, the screens can

be graphically different. Navigation

instructions and call information can be

set and displayed in the Information and

Entertainment System.

Home

The parameters shown on the display, for

the modes: Dynamic, Natural and

Advanced Efficiency are:

Time

Outside Temperature

Current Speed (shown if the repeat

modes of the Phone and Navigation

functions are not active)

Range

05036V0002EM

MENU Selection Button

05036S0004NA

Instrument Cluster Display

05036S0055NA

Instrument Cluster Display

Trip A And B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural,

and Advanced Efficiency) and with the

ignition device ON, the "Trip computer"

can be used to display the measurements

regarding the operating state of the

vehicle. This function is characterized by

two separate records, called “Trip A” and

“Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by

Information and Entertainment System),

where the “complete missions” (journeys)

are recorded in a reciprocally

independent manner.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display

the values relating to:

Distance travelled

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

Active trip

Fuel consumption indicator

To reset the values, push and hold down

the MENU button on the windshield wiper

stalk.

Performance

The displayed parameters differ

according to the active mode. The modes

which can be selected using the Alfa DNA

system are:

Natural

The screen graphically reproduces some

parameters closely linked to the

efficiency of the driving style, with a view

to limiting consumption.

Advanced Efficiency

The three central icons on the screen

indicate the effectiveness of the driving

style, linked to the following parameters:

acceleration, deceleration and gear

shifts, with a view to limiting

consumption. The bar below the icons

shows current consumption and the

green line represents the optimal area.

05036S0007NA

Instrument Cluster Display

05036V0002EM

Reset Button

05036S0009NA

Efficiency Consumption Graph

05036S0011NA

Dynamic Driving Style

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The globe lights up gradually according to

lower consumption.

Dynamic

The displayed parameters are related to

vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the

trend of the longitudinal/lateral

accelerations (G-meter information),

considering gravity acceleration as a

reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are also

indicated.

7. Vehicle Range

Indicates the miles left before the fuel

tank is empty.

Displays the position by indicating the

cardinal direction.

8. Failure Warning Lights

Area dedicated to displaying failures, the

following symbols could be displayed on

rotation:

Low criticality symbols (yellow amber)

High criticality symbols (red)

Customer Programmable Settings

Multiple settings can be programmed by

the user using the Information and

Entertainment System. This section

describes only the basic settings:

Units & Language

Time & Date

Cluster

To access the settings list in the

Information and Entertainment System,

proceed as follows:

Push the MENU button to access the

main menu.

Select “Settings” from he main menu

using the Rotary Knob.

Units & Language

The following settings can be modified

under the “Units & Language” menu:

Measure Units: select US, metric, or

custom. The custom option allows for

individual selection of the unit measures

Language: change the language of the

system

05036S0013NA

Acceleration Gauge

05036S0015EM

Information and Entertainment System

05036S0040EM

MENU button

0401135760US

Units & Language Selectable Menu

Options

Restore Settings: restores the factory

settings

To access and the change the setting,

turn and push the Rotary Pad.

Clock & Date

The following settings can be modified

under the “Clock & Date” menu:

Sync With GPS Time: activates or

deactivates the clock synchronization

through the GPS. If the function is

deactivated, the options Set Time and

Set Date are enabled

Set Time: set the time manually

Time Format: set the time format to

either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock)

Set Date: set the date manually

Restore Settings: restores the factory

settings

To access and the change the setting,

turn and push the Rotary Pad.

Cluster

The following settings can be modified

under the “Cluster” menu:

Warning Buzzer Volume: set the

volume of the warning buzzer

Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip

function

Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate

repeating the Phone function screens on

the instrument cluster display

Restore Settings: restores the factory

settings

To access and the change the setting,

turn and push the Rotary Pad.

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES ON THE

INSTRUMENT PANEL

The following pages consist of warning

lights and messages.

Note:

The warning light turns on together

with a dedicated message and/or chime

when applicable. These indications are

precautionary and as such must not be

considered as exhaustive and/or

alternative to the information contained

in the Owner’s Manual, which you are

advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this

section in the event of a failure

indication.

The failure indicators appearing on

the display are divided into two

categories: very serious and less serious

faults. Serious faults are indicated by a

repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.”

Less serious faults are indicated by a

warning "cycle" with a shorter duration.

You can stop the warning cycle in both

cases by pushing the button located on

the windshield wiper stalk. The

instrument panel warning light will stay

on until the cause of the failure is

eliminated.

0401135761US

Clock & Date Selectable Menu Options

0401135762US

Instrument Cluster Display Selectable

Menu Options

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE

This light monitors various brake functions, including

brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the

brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake

is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is

a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has

been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake

Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for

approximately four seconds. The light should then turn

off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It

does not show the degree of brake application.

For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to

have the system checked as soon as possible.

Release the electric park brake, then check that the

warning light has turned off.

If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)

FAILURE

The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates

either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is

not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly

lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to

have the system inspected immediately.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb

check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or

turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an

authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will

illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air

Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until

the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT

When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,

if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound

and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or

front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously

and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in

“Safety” for further information.

Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized

dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any

faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the

display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a

lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning

Light

What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light

will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position

and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the

Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and

service is required. However, the conventional brake system will

continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not

on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as

soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If

the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized

dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to

indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended

value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,

optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be

guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above,

the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire

in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher

then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have

the tire repaired.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the

vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale

illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement

or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow

the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same

size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an

authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low

The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire

pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that

slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire

duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is "See

Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving

Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the

indications that you find there.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR

LIGHT

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light

illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is

started.

ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is

indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates

that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off,

or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found

in the ESC system.

In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the

indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF

INDICATOR LIGHT

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light

illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is

started.

The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active

safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.

For further details about the active safety systems, refer

to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active

safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns

off.

REAR FOG LIGHT

The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is

activated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)

In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the

indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as

the engine is started.

The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the

traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws

and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling

at moderate speed but without demanding excessive

effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the

vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause

damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions

together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF

EQUIPPED

This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal

collision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

The indicator light (or the symbol in the display)

illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left

in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or

headlights are turned on.

Headlight Off Delay

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,

60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the

STOP position.

LEFTTURN SIGNAL

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash

independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well

as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as

selected when the multifunction lever is moved down

(left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with

the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light

button is pushed.

RIGHTTURN SIGNAL

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash

independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well

as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as

selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right).

This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left

directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is

pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high

beam headlights are activated.

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.

Push the multifunction control lever away from you to

switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a

second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,

“flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the

telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut

off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound

when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle

until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate

how much oil is in the engine.

Note:

Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.

The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the

amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on

the display upon entering the vehicle and also by

activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and

Entertainment System.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If

the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator

will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the

temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime

will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is

allowed to cool whichever comes first.

In normal driving conditions:

stop the vehicle, shut off the

engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is

not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to

cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top

offwith coolant and check that the level is between the MIN

and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually

for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the

telltale comes on when the engine is started again.

If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in

high-performance driving):

slow down and, if the telltale

stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes

with the engine running and slightly accelerated to

facilitate

better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that

the coolant level is correct as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILURE

If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering

assistance and the effort required to operate the steering

wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.

Note:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must

be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the

instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry

out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the

way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the

central position.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not

completely shut. An chime will signal when the doors is

open and the vehicle is moving.

Close all the doors properly.

HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed,

along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open

hood appears on the display.

A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is

moving.

Fully close the hood.

LIFTGATE OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale turns on when the liftgate is not properly

closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an

open liftgate appears on the display.

A buzzer is heard when the liftgate is open and the vehicle

is moving.

Close the liftgate.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE

The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to

indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot

engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONICTHROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING

LIGHTS

This telltale, along with the related message, signals a

failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the

engine is running.

If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate

intervention is required. A loss of performance,

irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take

place and the vehicle may need to be towed.

Place the gear selector in the park position and turn the

vehicle off: the telltale should switch off. Start the

vehicle. If the telltale remains solid (the telltale does not

flash) with engine running, the vehicle can still be driven

until proper maintenance can be performed. If the telltale

flashes with the engine running, do not drive the vehicle.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL

This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level

falls below the minimum recommended value.

OIL OVER MAXIMUM LEVEL

The telltale turns on, along with the respective message

on the instrument cluster display, to indicate that the

engine oil level is too high.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Run the engine under 3000 RPM during this time.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE

The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the

automatic steering correction system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE

The illumination of the telltale with engine on

corresponds to an alternator failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BRAKE DISC TEMPERATURE

When the telltale illuminates, it indicates an excessive

temperature of the brake discs.

Avoid aggressive brake maneuvers, hovering over the

brake pedal, and reduce vehicle speed to allow brake

systems to cool down.

Amber Symbols

Warning Lights What It Means What To Do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine

Immobilizer system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Break-In Attempt

The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to

ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt

detected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not Recognized

The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and

the electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system

failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT

The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred

and the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to

“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant

Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it

is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an

authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is

not available.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD

The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature

falls to or below 37°F (3°C).

Drive carefully during icy conditions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Lights What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED

The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

Note:

After the first indication, each time the engine is started

the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above

until the oil is changed.

If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a

fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now

necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of

the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated

by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the

engine from reaching operating temperature.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it

first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When

this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil

pressure sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level

sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM

FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

Forward Collision Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

START& STOP SYSTEM FAILURE

This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop & Start

system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

automatic windshield wiper.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the

automatic low beam alignment.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BLIND SPOTMONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot

Monitoring system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor

failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the

following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking

lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer

lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /

rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate

lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown

protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical

connection.

Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an

authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system

failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off

system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the

Lane Departure Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF

EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the

automatic high beam headlights.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING

The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission

overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this

case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or

idling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio

system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE

While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed

Limiter system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP

Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly

closed.

Tighten the cap properly.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to

signal a failure in the electric park brake system.

This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle

because the park brake could remain activated even if

automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant

controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the

park brake following the emergency disengagement

procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not

engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and

remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,

that the electric park brake is not operational.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle

coolant level is low.

Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.”

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WEAR ON BRAKE PADS

This light will illuminate when the brake pads have

reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note:

Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the

Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect

anomalies with factory parts.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED

This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake

discs have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note:

Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the

Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect

anomalies with factory parts.

Warning!

It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the

dynamic drive control system.

Contact an authorized dealer.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE

Signals a windshield wiper failure.

Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATION

Signals information and failures.

The accompanying messages describe the failure.

Contact an authorized dealer.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE

This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive

system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE

The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic

directional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION SELECTION — IF

EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable

suspension setting is activated.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED

While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure

in the suspension system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL

The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the

windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in

“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the

features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section

in “Technical Specifications.”

TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILURE

The telltale illuminates to indicate that there has been a

failure in the control unit that manages the trailer lights.

Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to the

socket. If the fault persists the next time you start the

engine, contact an authorized dealer to have the system

checked.

LIFTGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILURE

The telltale illuminates to indicate a liftgate electric

opening/closing system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have

the failure eliminated.

Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS

The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What It Means

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS

The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START& STOP OPERATION

The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start & Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).

When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And

Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED

The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM

The telltale illuminates when the HDC system intervenes.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM

Operation

The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system)

carries out a continuous diagnosis of the

components of the vehicle related to

emissions.

It also alerts the driver of when these

components are no longer in peak

condition by switching on the

warning

light on the instrument panel (see

“Warning Lights And Messages”

paragraph in this chapter).

The aim of the OBD system (Onboard

Diagnostic) is to:

Monitor the efficiency of the system

Indicate an increase in emissions

Indicate the need to replace damaged

components

The vehicle also has a connector, which

can interface with appropriate tools, that

makes it possible to read the error codes

stored in the electronic control units

together with a series of specific

parameters for engine operation and

diagnosis. This check can be carried out

by your authorized dealer.

Note: After eliminating a fault, to check

the system completely, your authorized

dealer is obliged to run tests and, if

necessary certain road tests.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an

Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and

a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance

of your emissions controls. Authorized

service technicians may need to access

this information to assist with the

diagnosis and service of your vehicle and

emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technician

should connect equipment to the OBD II

connection port in order to diagnose or

service your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connected to

the OBD II connection port, such as a

driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be

impaired or a loss of vehicle control could

occur that may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

Access, or allow others to access,

information stored in your vehicle systems,

including personal information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal

requirement to pass an inspection of your

vehicle's emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle

registration.

For states that require

an Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M), this

check verifies the

“Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on

when the engine is running, and that the

OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.

The OBD II system may not be ready if

your vehicle was recently serviced,

recently had a dead battery or a battery

replacement. If the OBD II system should

be determined not ready for the I/M test,

your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition

actuated test, which you can use prior to

going to the test station. To check if your

vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you

must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, but do not crank or start the

engine.

Note: If you crank or start the engine,

you will have to start this test over.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition

switch to the ON position, you will see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one

of two things will happen:

The MIL will flash for about ten

seconds and then return to being fully

illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition

or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and

you should not proceed to the I/M

station.

The MIL will not flash at all and will

remain fully illuminated until you place

the ignition in the off position or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is ready and you can

proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you

should see an authorized dealer or repair

facility. If your vehicle was recently

serviced or had a battery failure or

replacement, you may need to do nothing

more than drive your vehicle as you

normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the

above test routine may then indicate that

the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's

OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is

illuminated during normal vehicle

operation you should have your vehicle

serviced before going to the I/M station.

The I/M station can fail your vehicle

because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

This page is intentionally left blank

SAFETY

This very important section describes

the safety systems that your vehicle may

be equipped with, and provides

instructions on how to use them

correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS .......98

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . .102

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .112

SAFETYTIPS ..............137

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The vehicle may be equipped with the

following active safety devices:

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System

Drive Train Control (DTC) System

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System

Traction Control System (TCS)

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System

Hill Descent Control (HDC) System

For system operation, see the following

pages.

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System

An integral part of the braking system,

the ABS prevents one or more wheels

from locking and slipping in all road

surface conditions, regardless of the

intensity of the braking action. The

system ensures that the vehicle can be

controlled even during emergency

braking, allowing the driver to optimize

stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking

when the wheels are about to lock,

typically in emergency braking or

low-grip conditions where locking may be

more frequent.

The system also improves control and

stability of the vehicle when braking on a

surface where the grip of the left and

right wheels varies, such as in a corner.

The Electronic Braking Force Distribution

(EBD) system works with the ABS,

allowing the brake force to be distributed

between the front and rear wheels.

System Intervention

The ABS equipped on this vehicle is

provided with the "Brake-By-Wire"

(Integrated Brake System - IBS) function.

With this system, the command given by

pressing the brake pedal is not

transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.

Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt

on the pedal with the traditional system

is no longer noticeable.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticated

electronic equipment that may be

susceptible to interference caused by

improperly installed or high output radio

transmitting equipment. This interference

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking

capability. Installation of such equipment

should be performed by qualified

professionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will

diminish their effectiveness and may lead to

a collision. Pumping makes the stopping

distance longer. Just press firmly on your

brake pedal when you need to slow down or

stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws

of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase braking or steering efficiency

beyond that afforded by the condition of the

vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,

including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, following another vehicle too

closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless

or dangerous manner that could jeopardize

the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Drive Train Control (DTC) System

Some models of this vehicle are equipped

with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD),

which offers an optimal drive for

countless driving conditions and road

surfaces. The system reduces tire

slipping to a minimum, automatically

redistributing the torque to the front and

rear wheels as needed.

To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with

AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel

drive (RWD) when the road and

environmental conditions are such that

they wouldn't cause the tires to slip.

When the road and environmental

conditions require better traction, the

vehicle automatically switches to AWD

mode.

SAFETY

Note:

There may be a brief delay in shifting

to AWD mode after a tire slipping event

occurs.

If the system failure symbol switches

on, after starting the engine or while

driving, it means that the AWD system is

not working properly. If the warning

message activates frequently, it is

recommended to carry out the

maintenance operations.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System

The ESC system improves the directional

control and stability of the vehicle in

various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s

understeer and oversteer, distributing

the brake force on the appropriate

wheels. The torque supplied by the

engine can also be reduced in order to

maintain control of the vehicle.

The ESC system uses sensors installed

on the vehicle to determine the path that

the driver intends to follow and

compares it with the vehicle’s effective

path. When the real path deviates from

the desired path, the ESC system

intervenes to counter the vehicle’s

understeer or oversteer.

Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is

turning more than it should according to

the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer occurs when the vehicle is

turning less than it should according to

the angle of the steering wheel.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the ESC

warning light on the instrument panel, to

inform the driver that the vehicle

stability and grip are critical.

Warning!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,

including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery

surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot

prevent accidents resulting from loss of

vehicle control due to inappropriate driver

input for the conditions. Only a safe,

attentive, and skillful driver can prevent

accidents. The capabilities of an ESC

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in

a reckless or dangerous manner which could

jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure to

properly maintain your vehicle, may change

the handling characteristics of your vehicle,

and may negatively affect the performance

of the ESC system. Changes to the steering

system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely

affect ESC performance. Improperly

inflated and unevenly worn tires may also

degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle

modification or poor vehicle maintenance

that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC

system can increase the risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The system automatically operates in the

event of slipping, loss of grip on wet

roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on

one or both drive wheels on roads that

are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending

on the slipping conditions, two different

control systems are activated:

If the slipping involves both drive

wheels, the system intervenes, reducing

the power transmitted by the engine.

If the slipping only involves one of the

drive wheels, the Brake Limited

Differential (BLD) function is activated,

automatically braking the wheel which is

slipping (the behavior of a self-locking

differential is simulated). This will

increase the engine torque transferred to

the wheel which isn't slipping.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the ESC

warning light on the instrument panel, to

inform the driver that the vehicle

stability and grip are critical.

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System

The PBA system is designed to improve

the vehicle’s braking capacity during

emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking

by monitoring the speed and force with

which the brake pedal is pressed, and

consequently applies the optimal brake

pressure. This can reduce the braking

distance: the PBA system therefore

complements the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the PBA

system is obtained by pressing the brake

pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake

pedal should be pressed continuously

during braking, avoiding intermittent

presses, to get the most out of the

system. Do not reduce pressure on the

brake pedal until braking is no longer

necessary.

The PBA system is deactivated when the

brake pedal is released.

Warning!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on

the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction

afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA

cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns,

driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. The capabilities of a

PBA-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,

which could jeopardize the user's safety or

the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System

This is an integral part of the ESC system

that facilitates starting on slopes,

activating automatically in the following

cases:

Uphill: the vehicle is stationary on a

road with a gradient higher than 5%, the

engine is running, the brake is pressed,

and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N)

or a gear other than REVERSE (R) is

engaged.

Downhill: the vehicle is stationary on a

road with a gradient higher than 5%, the

engine is running, the brake is pressed,

and the transmission is in REVERSE (R).

When starting from a stop, the ESC

system control unit maintains the braking

pressure on the wheels until the engine

torque necessary for starting is reached,

or in any case for a maximum of two

seconds, allowing your right foot to be

moved easily from the brake pedal to the

accelerator.

The system will automatically deactivate

after two seconds without starting,

gradually releasing the braking pressure.

During this release stage, it is possible to

hear a typical mechanical brake release

noise, indicating the imminent movement

of the vehicle.

Warning!

There may be situations where the Hill Start

Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight

rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or

with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a

trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active

driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to

other vehicles, people, and objects, and most

importantly brake operation to ensure safe

operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is

always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow

these warnings can result in a collision or

serious personal injury.

100

SAFETY

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System

The DST function uses the integration of

the ESC system with the electric power

steering to increase the safety level of

the whole vehicle.

In critical situations for example (braking

on surfaces with different grip

conditions), the ESC system influences

the steering through the DST function to

implement an additional torque

contribution on the steering wheel in

order to suggest the most correct

maneuver to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakes and

steering increases the safety and control

of the vehicle.

Note: The DST feature is only meant to

help the driver realize the correct course

of action through small torques on the

steering wheel, which means the

effectiveness of the DST feature is highly

dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and

overall reaction to the applied torque. It

is very important to realize that this

feature will not steer the vehicle,

meaning the driver is still responsible for

steering the vehicle.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) System

The HDC function is an integral part of

the ESC system, keeping the vehicle at a

constant speed while descending a hill by

actively controlling the brakes.

HDC aims to create vehicle stability and

safer driving in various situations,

including poor grip conditions and steep

descents.

The system has three different modes:

Off: the system is deactivated

Enabled: the system is enabled and

ready to intervene when the activation

conditions are met

Active: the system actively controls

the vehicle speed

Enabling The System

To enable the system, push the HDC

switch located on the steering wheel.

The system is only enabled if the vehicle

speed is below 22 mph (35 km/h).

Activation of the HDC system is

indicated by the white

icon appearing

in the instrument cluster display.

Activation Of The System

Once enabled, the HDC system will

activate automatically if the vehicle is

driven on a downhill slope with sufficient

gradient, greater than 10%.

The speed set for the HDC system can be

adjusted using the SET switch located on

the steering wheel.

Once the desired speed has been

reached, release the SET switch and the

HDC system will maintain the set speed.

06006V0001EM

HDC Switch

06006V0002EM

HDC Symbol

07146V0017EM

HDC Speed SET Switch

101

After set speed is established, the HDC

system will automatically brake to keep

the vehicle at the set speed if the

accelerator pedal is released and the

vehicle gets close to the set speed.

It is possible to reduce the set speed with

the brake pedal. When the pedal is

released, the system will adjust the set

speed to the new current speed.

Note: Vehicle set speed can only be set

while traveling between 4 mph (6 km/h)

and 13 mph (25 km/h), and the feature

will only apply to a set speed placed in the

range of 6 mph (10 km/h) to 37 mph

(60 km/h).

The driver can cancel HDC system

intervention at any time by pressing the

accelerator pedal.

System Deactivation

The HDC system will be deactivated, but

remain available, if any of the following

conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling on a downhill

slope with a gradient less than 10%, on a

level surface, or on an uphill grade.

PARK (P) mode is engaged.

Disabling The System

The system is disabled if any of the

following conditions are met:

The HDC switch is pressed.

Cruise Control / Active Cruise Control

is activated.

A vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is

exceeded.

System deactivation is shown by the icon

on the display turning off.

Warning!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in

controlling vehicle speed when descending

hills. The driver must remain attentive to the

driving conditions and is responsible for

maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

The following auxiliary driving systems

are available in this vehicle:

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If

Equipped

Forward Collision Warning Plus

(FCW+) — If Equipped

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System

— If Equipped

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system

uses two radar sensors, located in the

rear bumper (one on each side), to detect

the presence of other vehicles in the rear

side blind spots of your vehicle.

The system warns the driver about the

presence of other vehicles in the

detection area by illuminating the

warning light located within the door

06016V0001EM

Rear Sensor Location

102

SAFETY

mirror on the side in which the other

vehicle was detected.

When the engine is started, the warning

light illuminates briefly to signal the

driver that the system is active.

Sensors

The sensors are activated when any

forward gear is engaged at a speed

higher than approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged.

The sensors are temporarily deactivated

when the vehicle is stationary or the

vehicle is in PARK (P).

The detection area of the system covers

approximately a lane on both sides of the

vehicle which is around 9 feet (3 m).

This area begins from the door mirror and

extends for approximately 19 feet (6 m)

toward the rear part of the vehicle.

When the sensors are active, the system

monitors the detection areas on both

sides of the vehicle and warns the driver

about the possible presence of vehicles

in these areas.

While driving, the system monitors the

detection area from three different input

points (side, rear and front) to check

whether an alert needs to be sent to the

driver. The system can detect the

presence of a vehicle in one of these

three areas.

Note:

The system does not alert the driver

of the presence of fixed objects (e.g.

safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).

However, in some circumstances, the

system may activate in the presence of

these objects. This is normal and does

not indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not alert the driver

about the presence of vehicles coming

from the opposite direction, in the

adjacent lanes.

Warning!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an

aid to help detect objects in the blind spot

zones. The BSM system is not designed to

detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

Even if your vehicle is equipped with the

BSM system, always check your vehicle’s

mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use

your turn signal before changing lanes.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

death.

Note:

For the system to operate properly,

the rear bumper area where the radar

sensors are located must stay free from

snow, ice and dirt gathered from the

road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper area

where the radar sensors are located with

any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack,

etc.).

If you wish to install a rear tow eye

after purchasing the vehicle, you will

need to deactivate the system via the

Information and Entertainment System.

To access the function, select the

following items in sequence on the main

menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Blind Spot Alert.”

Rear View

The system detects vehicles coming from

the rear part of your vehicle on both sides

and entering the rear detection area with

a difference in speed of less than 31 mph

(50 km/h) in relation to your vehicle.

0434132127US

BSM Indicator Light

103

Overtaking Vehicles

If another vehicle is overtaken slowly,

with a difference in speed of less than

approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and the

vehicle stays in the blind spot for

approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning

light on the door mirror of the

corresponding side illuminates.

If the difference in speed between the

two vehicles is greater than

approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the

warning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP)

System

This system assists the driver during

reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced

visibility.

The RCP system monitors the rear

detection areas on both sides of the

vehicle to detect objects moving toward

the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum

speed between approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects

moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph

(35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots.

The system activation is signaled to the

driver by an audible warning.

Note: If the sensors are covered by

objects or vehicles, the system may not

work as intended.

Warning!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a

back up aid system. It is intended to be used

to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in

a parking lot situation. Drivers must be

careful when backing up, even when using

RCP. Always check carefully behind your

vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check

for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing

up. Failure to do so can result in serious

injury or death.

Operating Mode

The system may be activated/

deactivated via the Information and

Entertainment System. To access the

function, select the following items on

the main menu in sequence:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Blind Spot Alert.”

"Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" Mode

When the system is enabled, the warning

light within the door mirror on the side of

the detected object illuminates.

The visual warning on the mirror will blink

if the driver activates the turn signals,

thus indicating the intention to change

lane.

The warning light will be constant if the

driver stays in the same lane.

"Blind Spot Alert" Function

Deactivation

When the system is deactivated ("Blind

Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP

systems will not emit neither an acoustic

nor visual warning.

The BSM system will store the operating

mode that was active when the engine

was stopped. Each time the engine is

started, the operating mode last set will

be recalled and used.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on

radio frequency that comply with Part

15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with

Industry Canada Standards RSS-

GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. The device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these

systems by other than an authorized

service facility could void authorization

to use this equipment.

104

SAFETY

Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)

System — If Equipped

This is a driving assistance system

composed of a radar located behind the

front bumper and a camera located in the

center of the windshield.

In the event of an imminent collision, the

system intervenes by automatically

applying the vehicle’s brakes to prevent a

collision or reduce its effects.

The system provides the driver with

audible and visual signals through

specific messages on the instrument

cluster display.

The system may lightly brake to warn the

driver if a possible frontal accident is

detected (limited braking). Signals and

limited braking are intended to allow the

driver to react promptly, in order to

prevent or reduce the effects of a

potential accident.

In situations with the risk of collision, if

the system detects no intervention by

the driver, it provides automatic braking

to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the

potential frontal collision (automatic

braking). If intervention by the driver on

the brake pedal is detected, but not

deemed sufficient, the system may

intervene in order to improve the

reaction of the braking system, therefore

reducing vehicle speed further

(additional assistance in braking stage).

The system will intervene automatically

in case of imminent collision or impact

against a pedestrian crossing the road

(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h).

Note: For safety reasons, when the

vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers

may remain blocked for about two

seconds. Make sure you press the brake

pedal if the vehicle moves slightly

forward.

Warning!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not

intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor

can FCW detect every type of potential

collision. The driver has the responsibility to

avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via

braking and steering. Failure to follow this

warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Engagement/Disengagement

The following functions can be selected

in sequence using the Information and

Entertainment System:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Forward Collision Warning.”

4. “Mode.”

Select from among three operating

modes:

Warning and brake: the system (if

active), in addition to the visual and

audible warnings, provides limited

braking, automatic braking and additional

assistance in braking stage, where the

driver does not brake sufficiently in the

event of a potential frontal impact.

Only warning: the system (if active),

does not provide limited braking, but

guarantees automatic braking or

additional assistance in braking stage,

06016V0003EM

Front Bumper Radar Location

06016V0004EM

Windshield Camera Location

105

where the driver does not brake at all or

not sufficiently in the event of a potential

frontal impact.

Disable: the system does not provide

visual and audible warnings, limited

braking, automatic braking or additional

assistance in braking stage. The system

will therefore provide no indication of a

possible collision.

Activation/Deactivation

The Forward Collision Warning system is

activated whenever the engine is started

regardless of what is shown in the

Information and Entertainment System.

Following a deactivation, the system will

not warn the driver about the possible

collision with a preceding vehicle,

regardless of the setting selected in the

Information and Entertainment System.

Note: Each time the engine is started,

the system is activated regardless of

what setting was selected when the

engine was turned OFF.

This function is not active at a speed

lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than

124 mph (200 km/h).

The system is active:

Each time the engine is started.

When feature is selected within the

Information and Entertainment System.

When the ignition is in the ON position.

When the vehicle speed is between

4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

When the front seat belts are

fastened.

Changing The System Sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can be

changed through the Information and

Entertainment System menu, choosing

from one of the following three options:

"Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the

description in the Information and

Entertainment System Supplement for

how to change the settings.

The default setting is "Med". With this

setting, the system warns the driver of a

possible collision with the vehicle in front

when that vehicle is at a standard

distance, between that of the other two

settings.

With the system sensitivity set to "Far",

the system will warn the driver of a

possible collision with the vehicle in front

when that vehicle is at a greater distance,

thus providing the possibility of acting on

the brakes more lightly and gradually.

This setting provides the drivers with the

maximum possible reaction time to

prevent a potential accident.

With the option set to "Near", the system

will alert the driver of a possible collision

with the vehicle in front when that vehicle

is close. This setting offers the driver a

lower reaction time compared to the

"Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a

potential collision, but permits more

dynamic driving of the vehicle.

The system sensitivity setting is kept in

the memory when the engine is turned

OFF.

System Limited Operation Warning

If a dedicated message is displayed, a

condition limiting the system operation

may have occurred. The possible reasons

of this limitation are something is

blocking the camera view or a fault.

If an obstruction is signaled, clean the

area of the radar on the front bumper,

and the camera area on the windshield.

If a fault in the system is occurring, it will

still be possible to drive the vehicle

normally, but automatic braking will not

be available in the event of an impending

collision.

When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, this will go back to normal

and complete operation. Should the fault

persist, contact your authorized dealer.

System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and a dedicated

message is shown on the display, it

means that there is a fault with the

system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the

vehicle, but you are advised to contact

your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

106

SAFETY

Radar Indication Not Available

If conditions are such that the radar

cannot detect obstacles correctly, the

system is deactivated and a dedicated

message appears on the display. This

generally occurs in the event of poor

visibility, such as when it is snowing or

raining heavily.

The function of this system can also be

temporarily reduced due to obstructions

such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In

such cases, a dedicated message will be

shown on the display and the system will

be deactivated. This message can

sometimes appear in conditions of high

reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective

tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions

limiting the system functions end, it will

go back to normal and complete

operation.

In certain cases, this dedicated message

could be displayed when the radar is not

detecting any vehicles or objects within

its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the

reason behind this message, check if the

sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to

clean or remove any obstructions in the

area.

If the message appears frequently, even

in the absence of atmospheric conditions

such as snow, rain, mud or other

obstructions, contact your authorized

dealer for a sensor alignment check.

In the absence of visible obstructions,

manually removing the decorative cover

trim and cleaning the radar surface could

be required. Have this operation

performed at your authorized dealer.

Note: It is recommended that you do not

install devices, accessories or

aerodynamic attachments in front of the

sensor or darken it in any way, as this can

compromise the correct functioning of

the system.

Frontal Collision Alarm With Active

Braking — If Equipped

If this function is selected, the brakes are

operated to reduce the speed of the

vehicle in the event of potential frontal

impact.

This function applies an additional

braking pressure if the braking pressure

applied by the driver does not suffice to

prevent potential frontal impact.

The function is active with speed above

4 mph (7 km/h).

Driving In Special Conditions

In certain driving conditions, system

intervention might be unexpected or

delayed. The driver must therefore be

very careful, keeping control of the

vehicle to drive in complete safety.

Driving close to a bend.

The vehicle ahead is leaving a

roundabout.

Vehicles with small dimensions and/or

not aligned in the driving lane.

Lane change by other vehicles.

Vehicles traveling at right angles to the

vehicle.

Note: In particularly complex traffic

conditions, the driver can deactivate the

system manually through the Information

and Entertainment System.

Driving Close To A Bend

When entering or leaving a wide bend, the

system may detect a vehicle in front you,

but not driving in the same driving lane. In

cases such as these, the system may

intervene.

06016V0005EM

Driving Around Wide Curves

107

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A

Roundabout

On a roundabout, the system could

intervene when it detects a vehicle ahead

that is leaving the roundabout.

Vehicles With Small Dimensions

And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane

The system cannot detect vehicles in

front of the vehicle if they are outside the

range of the radar sensor or may not

react to small vehicles, such as bicycles

or motorcycles.

Lane Change By Other Vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter

the same lane as your vehicle within the

operating range of the radar sensor, may

cause the system to intervene.

Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To

The Vehicle

The system could temporarily react to a

vehicle that is passing at right angles

through the radar sensor’s operating

range.

Warning!

The system has not been designed to

prevent impacts and cannot detect possible

conditions leading to an accident in

advance. Failure to take into account this

warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing the

trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of

reflecting metal objects different from

other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road

signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates,

level crossings, gates, railways, objects near

road constructions sites or higher than the

vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the

system may intervene inside multi-story

parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on

the road surface. These possible activations

are a consequence of the real driving

scenario coverage by the system and must

not be regarded as faults.

06016V0010EM

Driving In Roundabouts

06016V0006EM

Driving Near Small Vehicles

06016V0007EM

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

06016V0008EM

Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar

Range

108

SAFETY

The system has been designed for road

use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track,

the system must be deactivated to avoid

unnecessary warnings. Automatic

deactivation is signaled by the dedicated

warning light/symbol switching on in the

instrument panel (refer to the instructions in

the "Warning Lights And Messages On The

Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel" for further information).

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on

radio frequency that comply with Part

15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with

Industry Canada Standards RSS-

GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. The device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these

systems by other than an authorized

service facility could void authorization

to use this equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

The vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that

sends the inflation pressure information

of each tire to the control unit, and will

signal the driver in the event of

insufficient tire pressure.

Tire pressure will vary with temperature

by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every

12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the

outside temperature decreases, the tire

pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure

should always be set based on cold

inflation tire pressure. This is defined as

the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a

three hour period. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the maximum

inflation pressure molded into the tire

sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing

And Maintenance” for information on

how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.

The tire pressure will also increase as the

vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there

should be no adjustment for this

increased pressure.

The TPMS will signal the driver if

pressure falls below the warning limit for

any reason, including the effects of low

temperature and normal loss of pressure

from the tire.

The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient

tire pressure when pressure is equal to or

greater than the prescribed cold inflation

level. Therefore, if insufficient tire

pressure is indicated by the (

) warning

light displaying in the instrument cluster,

increase the inflation pressure up to the

prescribed cold inflation value.

The system will automatically update,

and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Warning Light” will turn off once the

system receives the updated tire

pressures. The vehicle may need to be

driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS

to receive this information.

Operating Example

For example, your vehicle may have a

recommended cold (parked for more than

three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi

(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is

68°F (20°C), and the measured tire

pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a

temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will

decrease the tire pressure to

approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).This tire

pressure is low enough to turn on the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.”

Driving the vehicle may cause the tire

pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi

(193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Warning Light” will still be on.

In this situation, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off

only after the tires are inflated to the

vehicle’s recommended cold placard

pressure value.

109

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS

pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system operation

or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the

same size, type, and/or style. The TPM

sensor is not designed for use on

aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a

poor overall system performance or sensor

damage. Customers are encouraged to use

OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature

operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After

using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle to

your authorized dealer to have your sensor

function checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from

entering the valve stem, which could

damage the TPMS sensor.

Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication

If an insufficient pressure value is

detected on one or more tires, the

warning light in the instrument cluster

will display alongside the dedicated

messages, the system will highlight the

tire or tires with insufficient pressure

graphically, and an acoustic signal will be

emitted.

In this case, stop the vehicle, check the

inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate

the necessary tire or tires to the correct

cold inflation pressure value, shown on

the display or in the dedicated TPMS

menu.

TPMS Temporarily Disabled:

TPMS Check Message

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then

remain on solid. The system fault will also

sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled,

this sequence will repeat, provided that

the system fault still exists. The “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will

turn off when the fault condition no

longer exists. A system fault can occur

due to any of the following:

Jamming due to electronic devices or

driving next to facilities emitting the

same radio frequencies as the TPMS

sensors.

Installing some form of aftermarket

window tinting that affects radio wave

signals.

Packed snow or ice around the wheels

or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped with

TPMS sensors.

After the punctured tire has been

repaired with the original tire sealant

contained in the TireKit, the previous

condition must be restored so that the

warning light is off during normal

driving.

TPMS Deactivation

The TPMS can be deactivated by

replacing all four wheel and tire

assemblies (road tires) with wheel and

tire assemblies that do not have TPMS

Sensors, such as when installing winter

wheel and tire assemblies on your

vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all

four wheel and tire assemblies (road

tires) with tires not equipped with Tire

Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors.

Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will

chime, the "TPMS Warning Light" will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then

remain on. The instrument cluster will

display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”

message and then display dashes (--) in

place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition switch

cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or

display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”

message in the instrument cluster.

110

SAFETY

Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of

the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four

wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)

with tires equipped with TPM sensors.

Then, drive the vehicle for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The

TPMS will chime, the "TPM Warning

Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then turn off. The instrument cluster

will display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”

message and then display pressure

values in place of the dashes. On the next

ignition switch cycle the "SERVICETPM

SYSTEM" message will no longer be

displayed, as long as no system fault

exists.

Note:

The TPMS is not intended to replace

normal tire care and maintenance, or to

provide warning of a tire failure or

condition.

The TPMS should not be used as a

tire pressure gauge while adjusting your

tire pressure.

Driving on a significantly

underinflated tire will cause the tire to

overheat, and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

The TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the

driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate

tire pressure gauge, even if

underinflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light”.

Seasonal temperature changes will

affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will

monitor the actual tire pressure in the

tire.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all radio frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference.

(2) This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

111

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety

features in your vehicle are the restraint

systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

Seat Belt Systems

Supplemental Restraint Systems

(SRS) Air Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in

this section may be standard equipment

on some models, or may be optional

equipment on others. If you are not sure,

ask your authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the

information in this section. It tells you

how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your

passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take

to minimize the risk of harm from a

deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under

should always ride buckled up in the rear

seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in

a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in

the front passenger seat, move the seat

as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint (refer to “Child

Restraints” in this section for further

information).

3. Children that are not big enough to

wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer

to “Child Restraints” in this section for

further information) should be secured in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat

in child restraints or belt-positioning

booster seats. Older children who do not

use child restraints or belt-positioning

booster seats should ride properly

buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle

with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the

shoulder belt behind them or under their

arm.

5. You should read the instructions

provided with your child restraint to

make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear

their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats

should be moved back as far as practical

to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or

window. If your vehicle has side air bags,

and deployment occurs, the side air bags

will inflate forcefully into the space

between occupants and the door and

occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle

needs to be modified to accommodate a

disabled person, refer to the “Customer

Assistance” section for customer service

contact information.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an

excellent driver, even on short trips.

Someone on the road may be a poor

driver and could cause a collision that

includes you. This can happen far away

from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save

lives, and they can reduce the

seriousness of injuries in a collision.

112

SAFETY

Some of the worst injuries happen when

people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat

belts reduce the possibility of ejection

and the risk of injury caused by striking

the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a

motor vehicle should be belted at all

times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder

System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if

equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to

remind the driver and outboard front

seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert

feature is active whenever the ignition

switch is in the STARTor ON/RUN

position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the

ignition switch is first in the START or

ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a

few seconds. If the driver or outboard

front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

is unbuckled when the ignition switch is

first in the STARTor ON/RUN position

the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on

and remain on until both outboard front

seat belts are buckled. The outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when an outboard front passenger

seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is

activated when the vehicle is moving

above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat

passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

(the outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard

front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and

sounding an intermittent chime. Once the

BeltAlert warning sequence has

completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light

will remain on until the seat belts are

buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence

may repeat based on vehicle speed until

the driver and occupied outboard front

seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

The driver should instruct all occupants

to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat

passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the

vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning

sequence will begin until the seat belts

are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard

front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an

animal or other items are placed on the

outboard front passenger seat or when

the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is

recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harnesses or pet carriers that are

secured by seat belts, and cargo is

properly stowed.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are

equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock

only during very sudden stops or

collisions. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the seat belt to move

freely with you under normal conditions.

However, in a collision the seat belt will

lock and reduce your risk of striking the

inside of the vehicle or being thrown out

of the vehicle.

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The air

bags work with your seat belt to restrain

you properly. In some collisions, the air bags

won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat

belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengers can

suffer much greater injuries if you are not

properly buckled up. You can strike the

interior of your vehicle or other passengers,

or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

113

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more likely

to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Occupants, including the driver, should

always wear their seat belts whether or not

an air bag is also provided at their seating

position to minimize the risk of severe injury

or death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you

could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow

these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe,

too.

Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted together can

crash into one another in a collision, hurting

one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder

belt or a lap belt for more than one person,

no matter what their size.

Warning!

A lap belt worn too high can increase the

risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt

forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic

bones, but across your abdomen. Always

wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as

possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect you

properly. In a collision, it could even cut into

you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your

body, without twists. If you can’t straighten

a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your

authorized dealer immediately and have it

fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong

buckle will not protect you properly. The lap

portion could ride too high on your body,

possibly causing internal injuries. Always

buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest

you.

A seat belt that is too loose will not

protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you

could move too far forward, increasing the

possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt

snugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is

dangerous. Your body could strike the inside

surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,

increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt

worn under the arm can cause internal

injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your

shoulder so that your strongest bones will

take the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not

protect you from injury during a collision.

You are more likely to hit your head in a

collision if you do not wear your shoulder

belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to

be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart

in a collision and leave you with no

protection. Inspect the seat belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or

loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble

or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a

collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating

Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door.

Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the

back of the front seat, and next to your

arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the

latch plate and pull out the seat belt.

Slide the latch plate up the webbing as

far as necessary to allow the seat belt to

go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to

fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle

until you hear a “click.”

06046V0001NA

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat

Belt Buckle

114

SAFETY

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug

and lies low across your hips, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt

portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the

latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under

the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red

button on the buckle. The seat belt will

automatically retract to its stowed

position. If necessary, slide the latch

plate down the webbing to allow the seat

belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting

Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a

twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as

possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)

above the latch plate, grasp and twist the

seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create

a fold that begins immediately above the

latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the

folded webbing. The folded webbing

must enter the slot at the top of the latch

plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up

until it clears the folded webbing and the

seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats,

the top of the shoulder belt can be

adjusted upward or downward to position

the seat belt away from your neck. Push

or squeeze the anchorage button to

release the anchorage, and move it up or

down to the position that serves you

best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than

average, you will prefer the shoulder belt

anchorage in a lower position, and if you

are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher

position. After you release the anchorage

button, try to move it up or down to make

sure that it is locked in position.

Note: The adjustable upper shoulder belt

anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up

feature. This feature allows the shoulder

belt anchorage to be adjusted in the

upward position without pushing or

squeezing the release button. To verify

the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,

pull downward on the shoulder belt

anchorage until it is locked into position.

Warning!

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you

could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow

these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe,

too.

Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack

so that it is comfortable and not resting on

your neck. The retractor will withdraw any

slack in the shoulder belt.

Misadjustment of the seat belt could

reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt

in a crash.

06056V0002EM

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage

4 — Adjustable Anchorage

115

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants

including pregnant women: the risk of

injury in the event of an accident is

reduced for the mother and the unborn

child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below

the abdomen and across the strong

bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt

across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the

back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped

with pretensioning devices that are

designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These

devices may improve the performance of

the seat belt by removing slack from the

seat belt early in a collision.

Pretensioners work for all size

occupants, including those in child

restraints.

Note: These devices are not a substitute

for proper seat belt placement by the

occupant. The seat belt still must be worn

snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).

Like the air bags, the pretensioners are

single use items. A deployed

pretensioner or a deployed air bag must

be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front seat belt system is equipped

with an Energy Management feature that

may help further reduce the risk of injury

in the event of a collision. The seat belt

system has a retractor assembly that is

designed to release webbing in a

controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating

positions are equipped with a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which

is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to

“Installing Child Restraints Using The

Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The

figure below illustrates the locking

feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is

equipped with an ALR and is being used

for normal usage, only pull the seat belt

webbing out far enough to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section

so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR

is activated, you will hear a clicking sound

as the seat belt retracts. Allow the

webbing to retract completely in this

case and then carefully pull out only the

amount of webbing necessary to

comfortably wrap around the occupant’s

mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the

buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder

belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat

belt will still retract to remove any slack

in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is

installed in a seating position that has a

seat belt with this feature. Children

12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in the rear seat of a

vehicle with a rear seat.

0226075266

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

16086V0101NA

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

116

SAFETY

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking

Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull

downward until the entire seat belt is

extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the

seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This indicates the seat belt is now

in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic

Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder

belt and allow it to retract completely to

disengage the Automatic Locking Mode

and activate the vehicle sensitive

(emergency) locking mode.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must be replaced

if the switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat

belt function is not working properly when

checked according to the procedures in the

Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode

to restrain occupants who are wearing the

seat belt or children who are using booster

seats. The locked mode is only used to

install rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraints that have a harness for

restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems

(SRS)

Some of the safety features described in

this section may be standard equipment

on some models, or may be optional

equipment on others. If you are not sure,

ask your authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to

protect you in a collision. The Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the

internal circuits and interconnecting

wiring associated with the electrical Air

Bag System Components. Your vehicle

may be equipped with the following Air

Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the

electronic parts of the air bag system

whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition

switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC

position, the air bag system is not on and

the air bags will not inflate.

117

The ORC contains a backup power supply

system that may deploy the air bag system

even if the battery loses power or it

becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning

Light in the instrument panel for

approximately four to eight seconds for a

self-check when the ignition switch is

first in the ON/RUN position. After the

self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will

turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction

in any part of the system, it turns on the

Air Bag Warning Light, either

momentarily or continuously. A single

chime will sound to alert you if the light

comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that

will illuminate the instrument panel Air

Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is

detected that could affect the air bag

system. The diagnostics also record the

nature of the malfunction. While the air

bag system is designed to be

maintenance free, if any of the following

occurs, have an authorized dealer service

the air bag system immediately.

The Air Bag Warning Light does not

come on during the four to eight seconds

when the ignition switch is first in the

ON/RUN position.

The Air Bag Warning Light remains on

after the four to eight-second interval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes on

intermittently or remains on while

driving.

Note: If the speedometer, tachometer,

or any engine related gauges are not

working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In

this condition the air bags may not be

ready to inflate for your protection. Have

an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your

instrument panel could mean you won’t have

the air bag system to protect you in a

collision. If the light does not come on as a

bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if

it comes on as you drive, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system

immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is

detected, which could affect the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),

the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will

illuminate on the instrument panel. The

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will

stay on until the fault is cleared. In

addition, a single chime will sound to alert

you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light has come on and a fault has been

detected. If the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving have an

authorized dealer service the vehicle

immediately. For additional information

regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” section of this manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and

lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and

front passenger. The front air bags are a

supplement to the seat belt restraint

systems. The driver front air bag is

mounted in the center of the steering

wheel. The passenger front air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel, above

the glove compartment. The words “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

06106V0001EM

Driver Front Air Bag

118

SAFETY

Warning!

Being too close to the steering wheel or

instrument panel during front air bag

deployment could cause serious injury,

including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending

your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag

Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has

multistage driver and front passenger air

bags. This system provides output

appropriate to the severity and type of

collision as determined by the Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC), which may

receive information from the front

impact sensors (if equipped) or other

system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered

immediately during an impact that

requires air bag deployment. A low

energy output is used in less severe

collisions. A higher energy output is used

for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a

driver and/or front passenger seat belt

buckle switch that detects whether the

driver or front passenger seat belt is

buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may

adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver

and/or front passenger seat track

position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air

Bags based upon seat position.

06106V0002EM

Passenger Front Air Bag

06096V0102NA

Drive Knee Air Bag Location/Knee

Bolster Location

06096V0103NA

Passenger Knee Air Bag Location/Knee

Bolster Location

119

Warning!

No objects should be placed over or near

the air bag on the instrument panel or

steering wheel because any such objects

could cause harm if the vehicle is in a

collision severe enough to cause the air bag

to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the air

bag covers or attempt to open them

manually. You may damage the air bags and

you could be injured because the air bags

may no longer be functional. The protective

covers for the air bag cushions are designed

to open only when the air bags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The air

bags work with your seat belt to restrain

you properly. In some collisions, air bags

won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat

belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide

additional protection by supplementing

the seat belts. Front air bags are not

expected to reduce the risk of injury in

rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front

air bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may

produce substantial vehicle damage —

for example, some pole collisions, truck

underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type

and location of impact, front air bags may

deploy in crashes with little vehicle

front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle

deceleration over time, vehicle speed and

damage by themselves are not good

indicators of whether or not an air bag

should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your

protection in all collisions, and also are

needed to help keep you in position, away

from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision

requiring the front air bags, it signals the

inflator units. A large quantity of

non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and

the upper passenger side of the

instrument panel separate and fold out of

the way as the air bags inflate to their full

size. The front air bags fully inflate in less

time than it takes to blink your eyes. The

front air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front

passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect

the knees of the driver and front

passenger, and position the front

occupants for improved interaction with

the front air bags.

Warning!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee

impact bolsters in any way.

Do not mount any accessories to the knee

impact bolsters such as alarm lights,

stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front

Passenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

mounted in the instrument panel below

the steering column and a Supplemental

Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the

instrument panel below the glove

compartment. The Supplemental Knee

Air Bags provide enhanced protection

during a frontal impact by working

together with the seat belts,

pretensioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air

Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air

Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air

Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard

side of the front seats. The SABs are

marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”

120

SAFETY

on a label or on the seat trim on the

outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of

occupant injury during certain side

impacts, in addition to the injury

reduction potential provided by the seat

belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam

on the outboard side of the seatback’s

trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys

through the seat seam into the space

between the occupant and the door. The

SAB moves at a very high speed and with

such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated

properly, or if items are positioned in the

area where the SAB inflates. Children are

at an even greater risk of injury from a

deploying air bag.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place

objects between you and the Side Air Bags;

the performance could be adversely

affected and/or objects could be pushed into

you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtains (SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtains (SABICs) are located above the

side windows. The trim covering the

SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head

and other injuries to front and rear seat

outboard occupants in certain side

impacts, in addition to the injury

reduction potential provided by the seat

belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering

the side windows. An inflating SABIC

pushes the outside edge of the headliner

out of the way and covers the window.

The SABICs inflate with enough force to

injure occupants if they are not belted

and seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SABICs

inflate. Children are at an even greater

risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of

partial or complete ejection of vehicle

occupants through side windows in

certain side impact events.

Warning!

Do not mount equipment, or stack

luggage or other cargo up high enough to

block the deployment of the SABICs. The

trim covering above the side windows where

the SABIC and its deployment path are

located should remain free from any

obstructions.

In order for the SABICs to work as

intended, do not install any accessory items

in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do

not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require

permanent attachments (bolts or screws)

for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not

drill into the roof of the vehicle for any

reason.

06106V0004EM

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side

Air Bag

06106V0005EM

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtain (SABIC) Location

121

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to

activate in certain side impacts. The

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular impact

event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. The side

impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to

impact events. The system is calibrated

to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact

side of the vehicle during impacts that

require Side Air Bag occupant protection.

In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy

independently; a left side impact deploys

the left Side Air Bags only and a

right-side impact deploys the right Side

Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is

not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all

side collisions, including some collisions

at certain angles, or some side collisions

that do not impact the area of the

passenger compartment. The Side Air

Bags may deploy during angled or offset

frontal collisions where the front air bags

deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the

seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags

deploy in less time than it takes to blink

your eyes.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who are up

against or very close to Side Air Bags can be

seriously injured or killed. Occupants,

including children, should never lean on or

sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the side air bags inflate, even if

they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where

appropriate) are necessary for your

protection in all collisions. They also help

keep you in position, away from an inflating

Side Air Bag. To get the best protection

from the Side Air Bags, occupants must

wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats.

Children must be properly restrained in a

child restraint or booster seat that is

appropriate for the size of the child.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not

lean against the door or window. Sit upright

in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bags

during deployment could cause you to be

severely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could

lead to more severe injuries in a collision.

The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt

to restrain you properly. In some collisions,

Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always

wear your seat belt even though you have

Side Air Bags.

Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious

in the interior trim, but they will open

during air bag deployment.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in

certain rollover events. The ORC

determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover

event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator

of whether or not Side Air Bags should

have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all

rollover events. The rollover sensing

system determines if a rollover event

may be in progress and whether

deployment is appropriate. In the event

the vehicle experiences a rollover or near

rollover event, and deployment of the

Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover

sensing system will also deploy the seat

belt pretensioners on both sides of the

vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of

partial or complete ejection of vehicle

occupants through side windows in

certain rollover or side impact events.

122

SAFETY

Air Bag System Components

Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and

interconnecting wiring associated with

electrical Air Bag System Components

listed below:

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

Note: Front and/or side air bags will not

deploy in all collisions. This does not

mean something is wrong with the air bag

system.

If you do have a collision which deploys

the air bags, any or all of the following

may occur:

The air bag material may sometimes

cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to

the occupants as the air bags deploy and

unfold. The abrasions are similar to

friction rope burns or those you might get

sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.

They are not caused by contact with

chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you

haven’t healed significantly within a few

days, or if you have any blistering, see

your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you may see

some smoke-like particles. The particles

are a normal by-product of the process

that generates the non-toxic gas used for

air bag inflation. These airborne particles

may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or

throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,

rinse the area with cool water. For nose

or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If

the irritation continues, see your doctor.

If these particles settle on your clothing,

follow the garment manufacturer’s

instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air

bags have deployed. If you are involved in

another collision, the air bags will not be

in place to protect you.

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt

pretensioners cannot protect you in another

collision. Have the air bags, seat belt

pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer

immediately. Also, have the Occupant

Restraint Controller System serviced as

well.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in

the interior trim, but they will open

during air bag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicle should

be taken to an authorized dealer

immediately.

123

Enhanced Accident Response

System

In the event of an impact, if the

communication network remains intact,

and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will

determine whether to have the Enhanced

Accident Response System perform the

following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)

Cut off battery power to the electric

motor (If Equipped)

Flash hazard lights as long as the

battery has power

Turn on the interior lights, which

remain on as long as the battery has

power or for 15 minutes from the

intervention of the Enhanced Accident

Response System.

Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to

perform any of these other functions in

response to the Enhanced Accident

Response System:

Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off

the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC

Circulation Door

Cut off battery power to the:

–Engine

–Electric Motor (if equipped)

–Electric power steering

–Brake booster

–Electric park brake

–Automatic transmission gear

selector

–Horn

–Front wiper

–Headlamp washer pump

Note: After an accident, remember to

cycle the ignition to the STOP

(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key

from the ignition switch to avoid draining

the battery. Carefully check the vehicle

for fuel leaks in the engine compartment

and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before

resetting the system and starting the

engine. If there are no fuel leaks or

damage to the vehicle electrical devices

(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset

the system by following the procedure

described below.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition

AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine

compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and

will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

124

SAFETY

Customer Action Customer Will See

Note:

Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in

Neutral

State).

2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light BLINKS.

4. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is ON SOLID.

6. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light BLINKS.

8. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light BLINKS.

9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID.

Left turn light is ON SOLID.

10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed

in Neutral State).

Right turn light is OFF.

Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.

12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be

completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).

System is now reset and the engine may be started.

Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be

performed again in order to be successful.

125

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when you need

it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to protect you. Do not modify

the components or wiring, including adding

any kind of badges or stickers to the

steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper

right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body

structure, or add aftermarket side steps or

running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of

the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell

anyone who works on your vehicle that it

has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part of your

air bag system. The air bag may inflate

accidentally or may not function properly if

modifications are made. Take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer for any air bag

system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced

in any way (including removal or

loosening/tightening of seat attachment

bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized

dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat

accessories may be used. If it is necessary

to modify the air bag system for persons

with disabilities, contact your authorized

dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road

obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics

and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

Note: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,

and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired during

a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other

parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be

buckled up at all times, including babies

and children. Every state in the United

States, and every Canadian province,

requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you

can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride

properly buckled up in a rear seat, if

available. According to crash statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats rather than in

the front.

126

SAFETY

Warning!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can

become a projectile inside the vehicle. The

force required to hold even an infant on your

lap could become so great that you could not

hold the child, no matter how strong you are.

The child and others could be badly injured or

killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should

be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of

restraints for children from newborn size

to the child almost large enough for an

adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you

have the correct seat for your child.

Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child

restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the

labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certifying

that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure

that you can install it in the vehicle where

you will use it.

Note:

For additional information, refer to

www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or

call: 1–888–327–4236

Canadian residents should refer to

Transport Canada’s website for

additional information: http://

www.tc.gc.ca/

eng/motorvehiclesafety/

safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers

Children

who are two years old or younger and

who have not reached the height or weight

limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Small Children

Children who are at least two years old or who

have outgrown the height or weight limit of

their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Larger Children

Children who have outgrown their

forward-facing child restraint, but are too

small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle

seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

outgrown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the

vehicle

127

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children

ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they

are two years old or until they reach

either the height or weight limit of their

rear-facing child restraint. Two types of

child restraints can be used rear-facing:

infant carriers and convertible child

seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing

in the vehicle. It is recommended for

children from birth until they reach the

weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either

rear-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often

have a higher weight limit in the

rear-facing direction than infant carriers

do, so they can be used rear-facing by

children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two

years old. Children should remain

rear-facing until they reach the highest

weight or height allowed by their

convertible child seat.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in

front of an air bag. A deploying passenger

front air bag can cause death or serious

injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child

restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who

have outgrown their rear-facing

convertible child seat can ride

forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the

forward-facing direction are for children

who are over two years old or who have

outgrown the rear-facing weight or

height limit of their rear-facing

convertible child seat. Children should

remain in a forward-facing child seat with

a harness for as long as possible, up to

the highest weight or height allowed by

the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is

above the forward-facing limit for the

child seat should use a belt-positioning

booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with

knees bent over the vehicle’s seat

cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child

and belt-positioning booster seat are

held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failure

of an infant or child restraint. It could come

loose in a collision. The child could be badly

injured or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in the

vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat

forward or rearward because it can loosen

the child restraint attachments. Remove the

child restraint before adjusting the vehicle

seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,

secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or

LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the

vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In

a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the

occupants or seatbacks and cause serious

personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster

Seats

Children who are large enough to wear

the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose

legs are long enough to bend over the

front of the seat when their back is

against the seatback, should use the seat

belt in a rear seat.

128

SAFETY

Use this simple 5-step test to decide

whether the child can use the vehicle’s

seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back

against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably

over the front of the vehicle seat – while

the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the

child’s shoulder between their neck and

arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs and

not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions

was “no,” then the child still needs to use a

booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is

using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat

belt fit periodically and make sure the

seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s

squirming or slouching can move the belt

out of position. If the shoulder belt

contacts the face or neck, move the child

closer to the center of the vehicle, or use

a booster seat to position the seat belt

on the child correctly.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,

the shoulder belt will not protect a child

properly, which may result in serious injury or

death. A child must always wear both the lap

and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of

the Child + Child

Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower

Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower

Anchors + Top

Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

129

Lower Anchors And Tethers For

CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child

restraint anchorage system called

LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren.

The LATCH system has three vehicle

anchor points for installing

LATCH-equipped child seats. There are

two lower anchorages located at the back

of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage

located behind the seating position.

These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without

using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some

seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In

these seating positions, the seat belt

must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint.

Please see the following table for more

information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight

of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the child

restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt

and tether anchor instead of the LATCH

system once the combined weight is more than

65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt

be used together to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a

rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH

anchorages if allowed by the booster seat

manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s

manual for more information.

022668173

LATCH Label

06086V0101NA

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol

(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

TopTether Anchorage Symbol

130

SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can a child seat be installed in the center

position

using the inner LATCH lower

anchorage?

Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a

child seat in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a

common lower LATCH anchorage?

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or

more child restraints. If the center position

does not have dedicated LATCH lower

anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child

seat in the center position next to a child seat

using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard

position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front

passenger seat if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact. See your

child restraint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints are removable.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages

are round bars that are

found at the rear of the

seat cushion where it

meets the seatback.

Each anchorage is

under a cover with the

anchorage symbol on it.

Lift the cover to access the lower

anchorage.

06086V0009NA

LATCH Anchorage Locations

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar

2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

131

Locating The Upper Tether

Anchorages

There are tether strap

anchorages behind each

rear seating position

located on the back of

the seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint

systems will be equipped with a rigid bar

or a flexible strap on each side. Each will

have a hook or connector to attach to the

lower anchorage and a way to tighten the

connection to the anchorage.

Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be

equipped with a tether strap. The tether

strap will have a hook at the end to attach

to the top tether anchorage and a way to

tighten the strap after it is attached to

the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Warning!

Do not install a child restraint in the

center position using the LATCH system.

This position is not approved for installing

child seats using the LATCH attachments.

You must use the seat belt and tether

anchor to install a child seat in the center

seating position.

Never use the same lower anchorage to

attach more than one child restraint.

Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-

Compatible Child Restraint” for typical

installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the

child restraint manufacturer when

installing your child restraint. Not all

child restraint systems will be installed

as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint

If the selected seating position has a

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,

following the instructions below. See the

section “Installing Child Restraints Using

the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type

of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower

straps and on the tether strap of the child

seat so that you can more easily attach

the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the

lower anchorages for that seating

position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise

the head restraint to get a better fit. If

the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make

room for the child seat. You may also

move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors

of the child restraint to the lower

anchorages in the selected seating

position.

0502135677US

Tether Strap Anchorage Locations

3 — Tether Strap Anchorages

132

SAFETY

4. If the child restraint has a tether

strap, connect it to the top tether

anchorage. See the section “Installing

Child Restraints Using the Top Tether

Anchorage” for directions to attach a

tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push

the child restraint rearward and

downward into the seat. Remove slack in

the straps according to the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is

installed tightly by pulling back and forth

on the child seat at the belt path. It should

not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in

any direction.

How To Stow An Unused

Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system

to install a child restraint, stow all ALR

seat belts that are not being used by

other occupants or being used to secure

child restraints. An unused belt could

injure a child if they play with it and

accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.

Before installing a child restraint using

the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt

behind the child restraint and out of the

child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt

interferes with the child restraint

installation, instead of buckling it behind

the child restraint, route the seat belt

through the child restraint belt path and

then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they

should not play with them.

Warning!

Improper installation of a child restraint

to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure

of the restraint. The child could be badly

injured or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used for adult

seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other

items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using

The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to

properly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could be

badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an infant

or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating

positions are equipped with a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that

is designed to keep the lap portion of the

seat belt tight around the child restraint

so that it is not necessary to use a locking

clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”

into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then

letting the webbing retract back into the

retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make

a clicking noise while the webbing is

pulled back into the retractor. Refer to

the “Automatic Locking Mode”

description in “Switchable Automatic

Locking Retractors (ALR)” under

“Occupant Restraint Systems” for

additional information on ALR.

133

Please see the table below and the

following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For

Installing Child Restraints In This

Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight

of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a

forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the

seat belt to install a forward facing child

restraint, up to the recommended weight limit

of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and

the child restraint is allowed, if the child

restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints can be removed.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the

seat belt against the belt path of the child

restraint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating

position with an ALR retractor.

16086V0101NA

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR)

TopTether Anchorage Symbol

134

SAFETY

Installing A Child Restraint With A

Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to

properly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could be

badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an infant

or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of

the seating position. For some second

row seats, you may need to recline the

seat and/or raise the head restraint to

get a better fit. If the rear seat can be

moved forward and rearward in the

vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front

seat forward to allow more room for the

child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing

from the retractor to pass it through the

belt path of the child restraint. Do not

twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle

until you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap

portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the

shoulder part of the belt until you have

pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the

retractor. Then, allow the webbing to

retract back into the retractor. As the

webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This means the seat belt is now in

the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the

retractor. If it is locked, you should not be

able to pull out any webbing. If the

retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing

to tighten the lap portion around the child

restraint while you push the child

restraint rearward and downward into

the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether

strap and the seating position has a top

tether anchorage, connect the tether

strap to the anchorage and tighten the

tether strap. See the section “Installing

Child Restraints Using the Top Tether

Anchorage” for directions to attach a

tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is

installed tightly by pulling back and forth

on the child seat at the belt path. It should

not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in

any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with

time, so check the belt occasionally, and

pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using

The Top Tether Anchorage:

Warning!

Do not attach a tether strap for a

rear-facing car seat to any location in front

of the car seat, including the seat frame or a

tether anchorage. Only attach the tether

strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating

position, located behind the top of the

vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint

System” for the location of approved tether

anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position

where you plan to install the child

restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward

to provide better access to the tether

anchorage. If there is no top tether

anchorage for that seating position,

move the child restraint to another

position in the vehicle if one is available.

135

2. Route the tether strap to provide the

most direct path for the strap between

the anchor and the child seat. If your

vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear

head restraints, raise the head restraint,

and where possible, route the tether

strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible,

lower the head restraint and pass the

tether strap around the outboard side of

the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the

child restraint to the top tether

anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap

according to the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

Warning!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap

could lead to increased head motion and

possible injury to the child. Use only the

anchorage position directly behind the child

seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear

seat, make sure the tether strap does not

slip into the opening between the seatbacks

as you remove slack in the strap.

Center Tether Special Instructions

Center Tether Attachment:

1. Lower the center head restraint to the

full down position.

2. Route the tether strap over the

seatback and head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the

child restraint to the center tether

anchorage located on the back of the

seat.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap

according to the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could

harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be

thrown about and possibly injured, or

injure a passenger during panic braking or

in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat

in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are

secured by seat belts.

0502135677US

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

3 — Tether Strap Anchorages

136

SAFETY

SAFETYTIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORTPASSENGERS IN

THE CARGO AREA.

Warning!

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with seats

and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you

unconscious and can eventually poison you.

To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety

tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer than needed

to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If you are required to drive with the

trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure

that all windows are closed and the climate

control BLOWER switch is set at high speed.

DO NOTuse the recirculation mode.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle

with the engine running, adjust your heating

or cooling controls to force outside air into

the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a

properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the

sound of the exhaust system, when

exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of

the vehicle is damaged, have a competent

mechanic inspect the complete exhaust

system and adjacent body areas for

broken, damaged, deteriorated, or

mispositioned parts. Open seams or

loose connections could permit exhaust

fumes to seep into the passenger

compartment. In addition, inspect the

exhaust system each time the vehicle is

raised for lubrication or oil change.

Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a

collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,

bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If

there is any question regarding seat belt

or retractor condition, replace the seat

belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on

for four to eight seconds as a bulb check

when the ignition switch is first turned to

ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at

your authorized dealer as soon as

possible. After the bulb check, this light

will illuminate with a single chime when a

fault with the Air Bag System has been

detected. It will stay on until the fault is

removed. If the light comes on

intermittently or remains on while

driving, have your authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to

“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”

for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost

mode and place the blower control on

high speed. You should be able to feel the

air directed against the windshield.

137

See your authorized dealer for service if

your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit

your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that

does not interfere with the operation of

the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.

Only use a floor mat that is securely

attached using the floor mat fasteners so

it cannot slip out of position and interfere

with the accelerator, brake or clutch

pedals or impair safe operation of your

vehicle in other ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or

stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat

fasteners may cause your floor mat to

interfere with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle

control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floor

mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT

install your floor mat upside down or turn

your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm

mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners

on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVETHE EXISTING FLOOR

MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before

installing any other floor mat. NEVER install

or stack an additional floor mat on top of an

existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fit

your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that

cannot be properly attached and secured to

your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be

replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat

for the specific make, model, and year of

your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on

the driver’s side floor area. To check for

interference, with the vehicle properly

parked with the engine off, fully depress the

accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal

(if present) to check for interference. If your

floor mat interferes with the operation of

any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,

remove the floor mat from the vehicle and

place the floor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat

on the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or

slide into the driver’s side floor area when

the vehicle is moving. Objects can become

trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch

pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle

control.

NEVER place any objects under the floor

mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects

could change the position of the floor mat

and may cause interference with the

accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removed

and re-installed, always properly attach

carpet to the floor and check the floor mat

fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

Fully depress each pedal to check for

interference with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soap

and water to clean your floor mats. After

cleaning, always check your floor mat has

been properly installed and is secured to

your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners

by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should

Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear

and uneven wear patterns. Check for

stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect

the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect

sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness.

Check the tires (including spare) for

proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of

brake lights and exterior lights while you

work the controls. Check turn signal and

high beam indicator lights on the

instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and

locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after

overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or

other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes

are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid

leaks are suspected. The cause should be

located and corrected immediately.

138

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and

see how you can explore its fullest

potential. We’ll look at how to drive

safely in any situation, making it a

welcome companion with our comfort

and wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE ........140

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF

EQUIPPED ................143

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS .........143

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ........144

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.....146

ALFA DNA SELECTOR .........152

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF

EQUIPPED ................154

STOP/STARTSYSTEM .........155

SPEED LIMITER .............157

SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE

CONTROL) ................158

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED ...............160

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM .......167

REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC

GRIDLINES ...............172

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM .................173

REFUELING THE VEHICLE .......176

VEHICLE LOADING ...........179

TRAILER TOWING ............180

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....186

139

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, be sure to

adjust the seat, the interior rear view

mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten

the seat belt correctly.

Never press the accelerator pedal before

starting the engine.

If necessary, messages indicating the

starting procedure can be shown in the

display.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake and set

the gear selector to PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedal without

touching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

4. If the engine doesn't start within a few

seconds, you need to repeat the

procedure.

If the problem persists, contact an

authorized dealer.

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid

into the throttle body air inlet opening in an

attempt to start the vehicle. This could

result in flash fire causing serious personal

injury.

Do not attempt to push or tow your

vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission cannot be

started this way. Unburned fuel could enter

the catalytic converter and once the engine

has started, ignite and damage the

converter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a

start from a booster battery or the battery

in another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to

“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”

for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

continuously crank the engine for more than

25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds

before trying again.

Remote Starting System

This system uses the key fob to start the

engine conveniently from outside the

vehicle while still maintaining security.

The system has a range of at least 300

feet (91 meters).

The remote starting system also

activates the climate control (if

equipped), the heated seats (if equipped),

and the heated steering wheel (if

equipped), depending on temperatures

outside and inside of the vehicle.

Note: Obstructions between the vehicle

and key fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be

met before the engine will remote start:

Gear selector in PARK (P).

Doors closed.

Hood closed.

Liftgate closed.

Hazard switch off.

140

STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not

pressed).

Battery at an acceptable charge level.

PANIC button not pushed.

System not disabled from previous

remote start event.

Vehicle alarm system indicator

flashing.

Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped

with keyless ignition system).

Fuel level meets minimum

requirement.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If

Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the

heated steering wheel and driver heated

seat features will automatically turn on in

cold weather.

These features will stay on through the

duration of remote start until the ignition

is cycled to the ON/RUN mode.

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer

Activation — If Equipped

When remote start is active and the

outside ambient temperature is less than

39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer

will be enabled. Exiting remote start will

resume previous operation, except if the

Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active.

The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and

operation will continue.

Cold Weather Operation

To prevent possible engine damage while

starting at low temperatures, this vehicle

will inhibit engine cranking when the

ambient temperature is less than –22° F

(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor

reading indicates an engine block heater

has not been used. An externally-

powered electric engine block heater is

available as optional equipment or from

your authorized dealer.

The message “plug in engine heater” will

be displayed in the instrument cluster

when the ambient temperature is below

5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is

shut off as a reminder to avoid possible

crank delays at the next cold start.

Caution!

Use of the recommended oil and adhering to

the prescribed oil change intervals is

important to prevent engine damage and

ensure satisfactory starting in cold

conditions.

Extended Park Starting

If the vehicle has not been started or

driven for at least 90 days, it is advisable

to follow the indications below.

To start the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the ignition button

2. If the engine does not start, wait five

seconds and let the starter cool down and

then repeat the starting procedure

3. If the engine does not start after eight

attempts, let the starter cool down for at

least 10 seconds, and then repeat the

starting procedure

If the problem persists, contact your

authorized dealer.

Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity,

very difficult starting, that can be noticed

through rapid fatigue of the starter,

might also be due to a partially flat

battery. In this case, refer to "Jump

Starting" in "In Case Of Emergency".

If Engine Fails To Start

Starting the Engine with Key Fob

Battery Run Down or Drained

If the ignition does not respond when the

button is pushed, the key fob battery

might be run down or drained. Therefore,

the system does not detect the presence

of the key fob in the vehicle, and will

display a dedicated message.

In this case, follow the instructions

outlined in "Starting With A Discharged

Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know

Your Vehicle" chapter, and start the

engine normally.

141

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid

into the throttle body air inlet opening in an

attempt to start the vehicle. This could

result in flash fire causing serious personal

injury.

Do not attempt to push or tow your

vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission cannot be

started this way. Unburned fuel could enter

the catalytic converter and once the engine

has started, ignite and damage the

converter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a

start from a booster battery or the battery

in another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to

“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”

for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

continuously crank the engine for more than

25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds

before trying again.

After Starting — Warming Up The

Engine

Proceed as follows:

Travel slowly, letting the engine run at

a reduced RPM, without accelerating

suddenly.

It is recommended to wait until the

digital engine coolant temperature

indicator starts to rise for maximum

performance.

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that is

not dangerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

3. With engine idling, push the

START/STOP button on the steering

wheel to STOP the engine.

Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON

mode when the engine is off.

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed

greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must

push and hold the ignition or push the

START/STOP button three times

consecutively within a few seconds. The

engine will shut down, and the ignition will

be placed in the ON mode

With the keyless ignition system, it is

possible to go away from the vehicle

taking the key fob with you, without the

engine switching off. The vehicle will

inform about the absence of the key on

board, only if the doors are closed.

Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON

to the STOP position) the accessories are

still powered for about three minutes, or

until a door is opened.

When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF

mode, the window switches remain active

for three minutes. Opening a front door

will cancel this function.

After severe driving, idle the engine to

allow the temperature inside the engine

compartment to cool before shutting off

the engine.

Turbocharger Cool Down

It is recommended before switching the

vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a

few minutes so that the turbocharger can

be suitably lubricated. This procedure is

particularly recommended after severe

driving.

After a full load operation, keep the

engine idling for three to five minutes

before switching it off.

This time allows the lubricating oil and

the engine coolant to eliminate the

excessive heat from combustion

chamber, bearings, inner components and

turbocharger.

142

STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF

EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the

engine and permits quicker starts in cold

weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC

electrical outlet with a grounded,

three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F

(-18°C), the engine block heater is

recommended. For ambient

temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the

engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed

under the hood, behind to the driver’s

side headlamp. Follow the steps below to

properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord

(access door on the passenger side wiper

cowl).

2. Pull the cord to the front of the

vehicle and plug it into a grounded,

three-wire extension cord.

3. After the vehicle is running, properly

stow away behind access door on the

passenger side wiper cowl.

Note:

The engine block heater cord is a

factory installed option. If your vehicle is

not equipped, heater cords are available

from your authorized dealer.

The engine block heater will require

110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate

the heater element.

The engine block heater must be

plugged in at least 1 hour to have a

warming effect on the engine and at

least 4 hours to have a warming effect

when ambient temperatures are below

-20 F (-29 C)

Warning!

Remember to disconnect the engine block

heater cord before driving. Damage to the

110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause

electrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

2.0L GME T4 Engine Break-In

For vehicles equipped with the 2.0L

GME T4, use the following engine

break-in recommendations:

Despite modern technology and World

Class Manufacturing methods, the

moving parts of the engine must still

wear in with each other. This wearing in

occurs mainly during the first 500 miles

(805 km) and continues through the first

oil change interval.

Note: A new engine may consume some

oil during its first few thousand miles

(kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered a normal part of the break-in

period and not interpreted as an

indication of a problem. Please monitor

your oil level during the break-in period

and add oil as required.

It is recommended for the operator to

observe the following driving behaviors

during the new vehicle break-in period:

0to100miles(0to160km):

Do not allow the engine to operate at

idle for an extended period of time.

Press the accelerator pedal slowly and

not more than halfway to avoid rapid

acceleration.

Avoid aggressive braking.

Drive with the engine speed less than

3500 RPM.

143

Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph

(88 km) and observe local speed limits.

100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):

Press the accelerator pedal slowly and

not more than halfway to avoid rapid

acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd

gears).

Avoid aggressive braking.

Drive with the engine speed less than

5000 RPM.

Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph

(112 km/h) and observe local speed

limits.

300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

Exercise the full engine rpm range,

shifting manually (paddles or gear shift)

at higher rpm’s when possible.

Do not perform sustained operation

with the accelerator pedal at wide open

throttle.

Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph

(136 km/h) and observe local speed

limits.

For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):

Do not participate in track events,

sport driving schools, or similar activities

during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).

Note: Monitor engine oil with every

refueling and add if necessary. Oil and

fuel consumption may be higher through

the first oil change interval.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE

The vehicle is equipped with electric park

brake to guarantee better use and

optimal performance compared to a

manually operated park brake.

The electric parking brake features a

switch located on the center console, a

motor with caliper for each rear wheel,

and an electronic control module.

The electric parking brake can be

engaged in two ways:

Manually, by pulling the switch on the

center console.

Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto

Park Brake" conditions.

Note: Normally, the electric parking

brake is engaged automatically when the

engine is stopped. This function can be

deactivated/activated on the

Information and Entertainment system

by selecting the following items in

sequence on the main menu: "Settings",

"Driver Assistance" and "Automatic

Parking Brake".

In addition to engaging the electric park

brake, along with steering and positioning

chocks in front of the wheels (when on a

steep slope), you must always place the

vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before

leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the

battery must be replaced in order to

unlock the electric park brake.

Engaging The Park Brake Manually

Briefly pull the switch located on the

center console to manually engage the

electric park brake when the vehicle is

stationary.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the

vehicle when engaging the electric

parking brake.

A slight movement of the brake pedal

may be detected when engaging the

electric parking brake with the brake

pedal pressed.

With the electric parking brake engaged,

the BRAKE warning light on the

instrument panel and the switch will

illuminate.

07046S0001EM

Electric Park Brake Switch

144

STARTING AND OPERATING

Caution!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failure

warning light on, some functions of the

electric parking brake are deactivated. In

this case the driver is responsible for brake

activation and vehicle parking in complete

safety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, the

use of the brake is required with the

vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the

center console pulled as long as the brake

action is necessary.

The BRAKE warning light may turn on

with the hydraulic system temporarily

unavailable; in this case, braking is

controlled by the motors.

The brake lights will also automatically

turn on in the same way as normal braking

with the use of the brake pedal.

Release the switch on the center console

to stop the braking action with the

vehicle in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle is

braked until a speed below 1.9 mph

(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept

pulled, the park brake will definitively

engage.

Note: Driving the vehicle with the

electric parking brake engaged, or using

it several times to slow down the vehicle,

may cause severe damage to the braking

system.

Disengaging The Electric Park Brake

Manually

In order to manually release the park

brake, the ignition should be in the ON

mode. Press the brake pedal, and then

push the switch on the center console

briefly.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the

vehicle, and a slight movement of the

brake pedal may be detected during

disengagement.

After disengaging the electric parking

brake, the BRAKE warning light on the

instrument panel and the light on the

switch will turn off.

If the BRAKE warning light on the

instrument panel remains on with the

electric parking brake disengaged, this

indicates a fault: in this case, contact an

authorized dealer.

Warning!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously

or fatally injured. Children should be warned

not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or

the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to

brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause

damage or injury.

Note: Always engage the electric

parking brake when parking the vehicle to

prevent injury or damage caused by the

unexpected movement of the vehicle.

Note: Never use gear position PARK (P)

instead of the electric parking brake.

Electric Park Brake Operating Modes

The electric park brake may operate as

follows:

"Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode

is activated by pulling the switch

repeatedly while driving.

"Static Engagement and Release

Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the

electric park brake can be activated by

pulling the switch on the center console

once. Push the switch and the brake pedal

at the same time to disengage the brake.

"Drive Away Release" — if equipped:

the electric park brake will automatically

disengage with the driver side seat belt

fastened and the detection of an action

145

performed by the driver to move the

vehicle (DRIVE [D] or REVERSE [R]).

"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is

lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear

selector is not in PARK (P) position and

the driver's intention of leaving the

vehicle is detected, the electric park

brake will automatically engage to hold

the vehicle in safety conditions.

"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed

is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric

park brake will automatically engage

when the gear selector is in PARK (P)

position. The light on the switch located

on the center console switches on

together with the BRAKE warning light on

the instrument panel when the park brake

is engaged and applied to the wheels.

Each automatic park brake engagement

can be cancelled by pressing the switch

on the center console and at the same

time moving the gear selector for the

transmission to position PARK (P).

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function that

automatically engages the electric park

brake in the event of a dangerous

condition for the vehicle.

The electric park brake engages

automatically to prevent vehicle

movement if:

The vehicle speed is below 2 mph

(3 km/h).

A transmission operating mode

different from PARK (P) is activated.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

The driver side door is open.

No attempts to apply pressure on the

brake pedal have been detected.

The “Safe Hold” function can be

temporarily disabled by pressing the EPB

switch located on the center console and

the brake pedal at the same time, with

the vehicle stationary and the driver side

door open.

Once disabled, the function will activate

again when the vehicle speed reaches

12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled

to STOP and then to ON.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The vehicle can be equipped with an

electronically controlled 8-speed

automatic transmission where gear

shifting automatically takes place,

depending on the vehicle usage

instantaneous parameters (vehicle

speed, grade, and accelerator pedal

position).

The new transmission is an absolute

innovation, as it can match the

Stop/Start system with the traditional

automatic transmissions with built-in

torque converter. For further

information, refer to the “Stop/Start”

section within this chapter.

Manual gear shifting can still occur

thanks to the "Sequential" mode position

for the gear selector.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.

You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift

146

STARTING AND OPERATING

the transmission into PARK, and turn the

ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in

the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against

unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to

touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in the

AVV or ON mode. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur if

the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE

only after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is

above idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure

your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Display

The following information is shown on the

dedicated area of the display:

In Automatic Mode: the active mode

(P, R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear

number.

In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential):

the mode (M), the current gear and the

double or single gear shift request, both

up and down (single or double arrow).

Gear Selector

The gear functioning is controlled by the

gear selector, which can assume the

following positions:

P = PARK

R = REVERSE

N = NEUTRAL

D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed)

AutoStick: + manually shift to higher

gear; – manually shift to lower gear

The positions diagram is illustrated on

the top of the gear selector.

The letter corresponding to the mode

selected on the gear selector lights up

and appears on the instrument cluster

display.

07076S0001EM

Gear Display

07076V0002EM

Gear Selector Center Console

1 — Gear Selector

2 — PARK (P) Button

147

To select a mode, move the gear selector

forward or rearward while pressing the

brake pedal. To engage REVERSE (R),

press the brake pedal together with the

gear selector button.

The gear selector is a joystick style

shifting mechanism which returns to the

center position automatically. It can be

pushed forward twice and rearward

twice, based on the starting condition.

The PARK (P) mode can be

enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK

(P) button. PARK (P) mode is

automatically activated if the following

conditions are met simultaneously:

DRIVE (D) mode or REVERSE (R) mode

is active

The vehicle’s speed is close to 0 mph

(0 km/h)

The brake pedal is released

The driver’s seat belt is not fastened

The driver’s door is open

To transition the vehicle into REVERSE

(R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into

DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R)

mode, it is necessary to move the gear

selector by pushing the gear selector

button.

When using AutoStick, activate it by

moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D)

to the left and then forward toward the -

symbol or backward toward the + symbol

and the gear is changed.

To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from

position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE

(D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be

moving at a low speed or stopped, and

the brake pedal must also be pressed.

Note:

DO NOTaccelerate while shifting

from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)

to another position.

After selecting a gear, wait a few

seconds before accelerating. This

precaution is particularly important with

engine cold.

It is not possible to select NEUTRAL

(N) mode from PARK (P) mode.

Transmission Operating Modes

PARK (P)

The transmission is locked in this mode.

The engine can be started in this mode.

Note: Never try to engage PARK (P)

mode when the vehicle is moving. Before

leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode

is engaged (letter P shown on the display

and gear selector) and that the park

brake is engaged.

When parking on a flat surface, first

engage the PARK (P) mode and then

engage the electric park brake.

When parking uphill, before activating

the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric

park brake. Otherwise, it could be

difficult to engage the (P) mode.

To check that the PARK (P) mode is

actually engaged, make sure (P) is

illuminated on the display and on the gear

selector.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as a

substitute for the park brake. Always apply

the park brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible

injury or damage.

Your vehicle could move and injure you

and others if it is not in PARK. Check by

trying to move the gear selector out of

PARK with the brake pedal released. Make

sure the transmission is in PARK before

leaving the vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.

07076V0005EM

Gear Selector

3 — Gear Selector Button

148

STARTING AND OPERATING

You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift

the transmission into PARK, and turn the

ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in

the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against

unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to

touch the park brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in the

ON mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Caution!

Before moving the transmission gear

selector out of PARK, you must push the

ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF

mode to the ON mode, and also press the

brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear

selector could result.

DO NOTrace the engine when shifting

from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear

range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

REVERSE (R)

Select this mode only with the vehicle at

a standstill.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is

standing for prolonged periods with the

engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the electric

park brake and shift the transmission

into PARK (P) if you must leave the

vehicle.

Warning!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off

the ignition to coast down a hill. These are

unsafe practices that limit your response to

changing traffic or road conditions. You

might lose control of the vehicle and have a

collision.

DRIVE (D)

Use this mode in normal driving

conditions.

Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or

REVERSE (R) modes must take place

only after releasing the accelerator

pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and

brake pedal pressed.

This mode ensures automatic

engagement of the most suitable gears

for driving needs and maximum fuel

economy in terms of consumption.

In this position, the transmission shifts

the gears automatically, selecting the

most suitable for forward driving among

those available as you go. In this way the

vehicle's optimal driving characteristics

are provided for all conditions.

AutoStick

In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for

sport driving, when the vehicle is driven

with a heavy load, on slopes, when towing

heavy trailers), it is recommended to use

the AutoStick (sequential shifting) mode

to select and keep a lower fixed ratio.

In these conditions, the use of a lower

gear improves vehicle performance and

prevents overheating.

It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D)

mode to AutoStick mode regardless of

vehicle speed.

149

Activation

Starting from DRIVE (D) mode, to

activate the sequential drive mode, move

the gear selector to the left (– and +

indication of the trim). The gear engaged

will be shown on the display.

Shifting is made by moving the gear

selector forward, toward symbol – or

backward, toward symbol +.

Steering Column Mounted Shift

Paddles — If Equipped

The gear can be manually shifted also by

using the paddles behind the steering

wheel, pull the right paddle (+) toward the

steering wheel and release it to engage a

higher gear, perform the same operation

with the left paddle (-) to engage a lower

gear.

Note: If only one manual shift is

necessary, the letter (D) will remain on

the display with the engaged gear next to

it.

Deactivation

To deactivate the sequential driving

mode, bring the gear selector back in

position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving

mode).

Warning!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle

could skid, causing a collision or personal

injury.

Note:

To select the correct gear for

maximum deceleration (engine brake),

just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the

transmission goes to an operating mode

in which the vehicle can slow down

easily.

The vehicle will keep the gear

selected by the driver until the safety

conditions allow it.

This means, for example, that the

system will try to prevent the engine

from switching off, automatically

downshifting if the engine speed is too

low.

Automatic Transmission Limp Home

Mode

Transmission function is monitored

electronically for abnormal conditions. If

a condition is detected that could result

in transmission damage, Transmission

Limp Home Mode is activated.

In this condition, the transmission stays

in fourth gear, regardless of the selected

gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)

and NEUTRAL (N) still work.

The

symbol might light up in the

instrument cluster.

Temporary failure

In the event of a momentary problem, the

transmission can be reset to regain all

forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P),

if possible. If not, shift the transmission

to NEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until the

engine turns OFF.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then

restart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range. If

the problem is no longer detected, the

transmission will return to normal

operation.

07076V0006EM

Steering Column Mounted Shift

Paddles

150

STARTING AND OPERATING

Note: Even if the transmission can be

reset, we recommend that you visit your

authorized dealer at your earliest

possible convenience. Your authorized

dealer has diagnostic equipment to

determine if the problem could reoccur. If

the transmission cannot be reset, service

is required at your authorized dealer.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake

Transmission Shift Interlock system

(BTSI) that holds the gear selector in

PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.

This system prevents you from moving

the gear selector from position PARK (P)

unless the brakes are applied.

To shift the transmission out of PARK (P),

the ignition must be cycled to the ON

position (engine running or not) and the

brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

Disabling

Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the

vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing

systems), inhibit the automatic activation

of PARK (P) mode when stopping the

engine. To do so, follow the directions

below:

1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill.

2. Place the transmission in the

NEUTRAL (N) position.

3. Push the ignition button for at least

three seconds.

The automatic activation of PARK (P)

when the engine is stopped can also be

deactivated on the Information and

Entertainment system by selecting the

following functions on the main menu:

"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and

"Automatic Parking Brake".

Important Notes

Failure to comply with what is reported

below may damage the transmission:

Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the

vehicle at a standstill.

Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass

from REVERSE to another mode only

with the vehicle at a standstill and engine

idling.

Do not change between PARK (P),

REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D)

modes with engine running at a speed

above idling.

Before activating any transmission

operating mode, fully depress the brake

pedal.

Note: The unexpected movement of the

vehicle can injure the occupants or

people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle

with engine running: before getting out of

the passenger compartment always

engage the electric park brake, select the

PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.

You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift

the transmission into PARK, and turn the

ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in

the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against

unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing

children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child

or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to

touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the

transmission gear selector.

151

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in the

AVV or ON mode. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Caution!

Only engage the gear with engine at idling

while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the

transmission temperature exceeds the

normal operating limits, the transmission

control unit may change the gear

engagement order and reduce the drive

torque. If the transmission overheats, it

could operate incorrectly until it cools down.

When using the vehicle with extremely

low external temperatures, the

transmission operation may change

depending on the engine and transmission

temperature, as well as vehicle speed.

Activation of the torque converter clutch

and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the

transmission oil is correctly warmed up.

Complete operation of the transmission will

be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature

reaches the predefined value.

ALFA DNA SELECTOR

Alfa DNA System

This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA

system selector (located on the center

console). There are three modes of

operation to be selected according to

driving style and road conditions:

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).

n = Natural (mode for driving in normal

conditions).

a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving

mode for maximum fuel savings).

= Adjusts the calibration of the

active suspension (if equipped).

On the instrument panel display, the

different modes are characterized by

different colors:

Natural - Blue

Dynamic - Red

Advanced Efficiency - Green

Each driving mode is graphically different

in frame color and contents of each

individual "performance" screen.

Driving Modes

"Natural" Mode

“Natural” Mode is characterized by

reduced engine performance and ECO

shifting strategy for the automatic

transmission.

07076S0004BASE

Alfa DNA System Selector

07076S0003EM

Mode Display

152

STARTING AND OPERATING

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to

the letter "n"; the display will light up in

blue.

The "Performance" screen graphically

reproduces some parameters closely

linked to the efficiency of the driving

style, with a view to limiting consumption.

"Dynamic" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to

the letter "d"; the display will light up in

red.

ESC and ASR systems: intervention

thresholds that ensure more enjoyable,

sportier driving while guaranteeing the

stability of the vehicle.

Engine and transmission: adoption of

sports mapping.

Warning!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the

accelerator pedal increases considerably.

Consequently, driving is less fluid and

comfortable.

07116S0002EM

Natural Mode

07116S0001EM

Natural Mode Performance Display

07116S0003EM

Dynamic Mode

07116S0006EM

Dynamic Mode Performance Display

The "Performance" screen displays

parameters related to vehicle stability,

the graphs illustrate the trend of the

longitudinal/lateral accelerations

(G-meter information), considering

gravity acceleration as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed

on the right.

153

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to

the letter "a"; the display will light up in

green.

ESC and ASR systems: intervention

thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum

safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is

advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency"

mode in the presence of low-grip road

surfaces.

Engine and transmission: standard

response.

The "Performance" screen graphically

displays some parameters closely

related to the vehicle consumption.

Driving Mode Deactivation

To deactivate any driving mode, simply

move the selector to any other mode.

Note:

The next time that the engine is

started, the "Advanced Efficiency",

"Dynamic" and "Natural" mode selected

previously is retained. The system will

reactivate in "Advanced Efficiency",

"Dynamic" or "Natural" mode, depending

on which mode was selected before the

engine was stopped.

It is not possible to go directly from

"Dynamic" mode to "Advanced

Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You

must always activate the “Natural”

mode first and then select the other

mode.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION

(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle's electronic suspension

management system is aimed at

optimizing the vehicle's performance.

The system continuously monitors the

damping of the suspensions through the

actuator installed on each shock

absorber. This way, the calibration of the

shock absorbers can be adjusted to the

conditions of the road surface and to the

dynamic conditions of the vehicle,

improving its comfort and road holding.

The driver can choose, even while driving,

(only in "Dynamic” mode), between two

types of suspension calibration: a more

sporty or a more comfortable one.

By pushing the button, the system

changes the shock absorber calibration.

In case of a system failure, the symbol

and a dedicated message will be

shown on the instrument panel display.

07116S0005EM

Advanced Efficiency Mode

07116S0008EM

Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance

Display

04306V0001EM

Alfa Active Suspension Button

154

STARTING AND OPERATING

STOP/START SYSTEM

The Stop/Start system automatically

shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop

if the required conditions are met.

Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal will automatically restart the

engine.

The function was developed to increase

vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel

consumption, gas emissions, and sound

pollution.

Note: When the Stop/Start system

stops the engine, the power steering is

also disabled.

Operating Mode

Stopping The Engine

With the vehicle at a standstill and brake

pedal pressed, the engine switches off if

the gear selector is in a position other

than REVERSE (R).

The system does not operate when the

gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order

to make parking maneuvers easier.

In the event of stops uphill, engine

switching off is disabled to make the "Hill

Start Assist" function available (works

only with running engine).

Note: The engine can only be

automatically stopped after having run at

about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an

automatic restart, the vehicle only needs

to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h)

to stop the engine.

Engine stopping is signaled by the

symbol lighting up on the instrument

cluster display.

Restarting The Engine

To restart the engine, release the brake

pedal.

With the brake pressed and the

transmission in automatic mode DRIVE

(D), the engine will restart by shifting to

REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to

"AutoStick".

With brake pressed if the gear selector is

in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will

restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by

moving the selector to + or -.

System Manual Activation/

Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate the

system, push the button located in the

control panel on the left of the steering

wheel.

System Activation

The activation of the system is indicated

by the

symbol lighting up on the

display. In this condition, the light on the

button is off.

System Deactivation

A message will appear on the display

when the system is deactivated. In this

condition, the light on the button is on.

Note: Each time the engine is started,

the system is activated regardless of

where was when it was previously

switched off.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

Autostop

For higher comfort and increased safety,

and to reduce emissions, there are

certain conditions where the engine will

not autostop despite the system being

active, such as:

Engine still cold.

Especially cold outside temperature.

Battery not sufficiently charged.

Driver's door not shut.

Driver's seat belt not fastened.

Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking

maneuvers).

With the automatic climate control

active, an adequate cabin heating or

cooling comfort has not been reached or

with MAX-DEF function active.

07126V0001NA

Stop/Start On/Off Button

155

During the first period of use, to

initialize the system.

Steering angle beyond threshold.

Engine Restarting Conditions

Due to comfort, emission control, and

safety reasons, the engine can restart

automatically without any action by the

driver, under special conditions, such as:

Battery not sufficiently charged.

Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g.

if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly).

Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on

roads with a grade).

Engine stopping by the Stop/Start

system for more than approx. three

minutes.

With the automatic climate control

active, an adjustment in cabin heating or

cooling is made or with MAX-DEF

function active.

Safety Functions

When the engine is stopped through the

Stop/Start system, if the driver releases

their seat belt, opens the driver's or

passenger's door, or opens the hood from

inside the vehicle, the engine can be

restarted only by using the ignition.

This condition is indicated to the driver

both through a buzzer and a message on

the instrument cluster display.

Energy Saving Function

If the driver does not carry out any action

for more than three minutes after the

automatic engine restart, the Start/Stop

system will switch off the engine in order

to prevent fuel consumption.

In this situation, the engine can only be

restarted using the ignition device.

Note: It is possible to keep the engine

running by deactivating the system.

Irregular Operation

In the event of malfunction, the

Stop/Start system is deactivated.

For failure indications, refer to "Warning

Lights and Messages" paragraph in

"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel".

Vehicle Inactivity

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the

battery is replaced), special attention

must be paid to the disconnection of the

battery power supply.

Proceed as follows:

Remove connector from socket to

disconnect sensor (battery status

monitoring) installed on the negative pole

of the battery. This sensor should never

be disconnected from the pole except if

the battery is replaced.

Note: After setting the ignition to STOP

and having closed the driver side door,

wait at least one minute before

disconnecting the electrical supply from

the battery. When reconnecting the

electrical supply to the battery, make

sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode

and the driver side door is closed.

07126V0002EM

Battery Power Supply

1 — Socket

2 — Sensor

3 — Connector

156

STARTING AND OPERATING

SPEED LIMITER

Description

This feature allows the speed of the

vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can

be set by the driver.

The maximum speed can be set with the

vehicle stationary or in motion. The

minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph

(30mk/h).

When this feature is active, the vehicle

speed depends on the pressing of the

accelerator pedal until the programmed

speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit

Programming" paragraph).

Activation

The feature can be activated/

deactivated through the Information and

Entertainment System.

Activating The Device

To access this feature on the main menu,

select the following items in sequence:

"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and

“ON”.

The activation of this feature is signaled

by the displaying of the green symbol

along with the last speed set. The Speed

Limiter feature can remain active

concurrently with the Speed Control

system. If a speed limit below the one

indicated in the Speed Control is

selected, the Speed Control speed will be

lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This

function remains available in RACE mode.

Speed Limit Programming

The speed limit can be programmed

through the Information and

Entertainment System.

To access the function on the main menu,

select the following items in sequence:

"Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter

Set Speed".

By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed

increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a

minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a

maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

Exceeding The Programmed Speed

By fully pressing the accelerator pedal,

the programmed speed can be exceeded

even with the device active (e.g. in the

event of overtaking).

The device is disabled until the speed

drops below the set limit, after which it

reactivates automatically.

Programmed Speed Icon Flashing

The programmed speed will flash in the

following scenarios:

When the accelerator pedal has been

fully pressed and the vehicle has

exceeded the programmed speed.

Activating the system after setting a

limit below the effective speed of the

vehicle.

In the event of overtake acceleration.

Deactivation

The feature can be activated/

deactivated through the Information and

Entertainment System.

Deactivating The Device

To access this feature on the main menu,

select the following items in sequence:

"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and

“OFF”.

Automatic Deactivation Of The Device

The device deactivates automatically in

the event of fault in the system. In this

case, contact an authorized dealer.

Temporary Signal Loss

When the devices loses the signal, the

white symbol without the speed

indication illuminates on the display.

System Failure

If there is a system failure, the amber

symbol

illuminates on the display.

07136S0001EM

Speed Limiter Display

157

SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE

CONTROL)

Speed Control Description

This is an electronically controlled driving

assistance feature that allows the

desired vehicle speed to be maintained,

without having to press the accelerator

pedal. This feature can be used at a speed

above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long

stretches of dry, straight roads with few

variations (highways).

The speed control buttons are located on

the left side of the steering wheel.

Note:

To ensure correct operation, the

speed control is designed to deactivate

if more than one function is operated

simultaneously. In this case, the system

can be reactivated by pushing the on/off

button

and setting the desired

speed.

It is not recommended to use this

feature in city traffic.

While driving downhill, the system

could brake the vehicle to keep the set

speed the same.

Warning!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed.

Your vehicle could go too fast for the

conditions, and you could lose control and

have an accident. Do not use Speed Control

in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,

icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Activate

To activate the Speed Control System,

push the on/off button located on the left

side of the steering wheel.

The activation of the system is signaled

by the white warning light

illuminating

in the instrument cluster display.

The Speed Control function can remain

active at the same time as the Speed

Limiter System. If a speed limit below the

one indicated in the set speed control is

set, the speed control speed will be

lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when

not in use is dangerous. You could

accidentally set the system or cause it to go

faster than you want. You could lose control

and have an accident. Always leave the

system OFF when you are not using it.

Setting The Desired Speed

To set a desired speed, proceed as

follows:

1. Turn the Speed Control on.

2. When the vehicle has reached the

desired speed, push the SET switch up or

down and release to activate. When the

accelerator is released, the vehicle will

maintain the selected speed

automatically.

07146V0001EM

Speed Control On/Off Button

07146V0002EM

Set Switch Location

158

STARTING AND OPERATING

If needed (when overtaking for instance),

you can accelerate beyond the set speed

by pressing the accelerator. When you

release the pedal, the vehicle goes back

to the previously set speed.

When traveling downhill with the system

active, the vehicle speed may slightly

exceed the set one.

Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the

vehicle must be traveling at a constant

speed on a flat surface.

To Vary The Speed Setting

Increasing Speed

Once the Speed Control has been

activated, the speed can be increased by

pushing the SET switch upward.

By keeping the switch pushed, the set

speed will increase until the button is

released. The new speed will then be set.

At every movement of the SET switch,

the set speed will be adjusted.

Decreasing Speed

When the system is active, to reduce the

speed, push the SET switch downward.

By keeping the switch pushed, the set

speed will decrease until the button is

released. The new speed will then be set.

At every movement of the SET switch,

the set speed will be adjusted.

Note: Moving the SET switch allows the

driver to adjust the speed according to

the selected unit of measurement set in

the Information and Entertainment

System (see dedicated supplement).

Accelerating When Overtaking

Press the accelerator as you would

normally. When the pedal is released, the

vehicle will return to the set speed.

Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes

The vehicle can automatically downshift

to keep the set speed when driving on

hilly routes.

On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed

may be considerable and is advisable to

deactivate the Speed Control system.

Note: The system keeps the speed set

even uphill and downhill. A slight variation

in the speed on slight elevations is

completely normal.

To Resume The Speed

Note: Before returning to the previously

set speed, you must accelerate to a

speed close to the set speed, then push

and release the RES button.

To Deactivate

Lightly pressing the brake pedal

deactivates the speed control without

deleting the set speed.

The speed control may also be

deactivated by applying the electric park

brake or when the braking system is

operated (e.g. operation of the ESC

system).

The set speed is deleted in the following

cases:

Pushing the on/off button twice

The ignition is cycled to the STOP

position

There is a malfunction with the Speed

Control.

07146V0003EM

Resume Button Location

159

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED

System Description

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver

assist system that combines the speed

control functions with maintaining the

distance from the vehicle ahead.

The system allows to set and hold the

vehicle at the desired speed without

needing to press the accelerator. It also

allows to set and hold a distance from the

vehicle ahead (these settings are set by

the driver).

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system uses a radar sensor located

behind the front bumper and a camera

located in the center/upper part of the

windshield, to detect the presence of a

vehicle close ahead.

This system enhances driving comfort

while on the highway or out of town with

light traffic.

If the sensor does not detect a vehicle

ahead, the system will maintain a fixed

set speed.

If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the

system automatically intervenes by

braking (or accelerating) slightly in order

keep the set distance while not

exceeding the original set speed, seeking

to adapt to the speed of the vehicle

ahead.

Note: Adaptive Cruise Control

performance is not guaranteed under the

following circumstances, and it is

recommended to disable the system

under the following circumstances:

Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.

Driving in heavy traffic or

construction zones.

Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads,

roads with steep climbs and descents, or

roads with numerous turns and bends.

Entering a turn lane.

Towing a trailer.

When circumstances do not allow

safe driving at a constant speed.

Warning!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a

convenience system. It is not a substitute

for active driving involvement. It is always

the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of

road, traffic, and weather conditions,

vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;

and, most importantly, brake operation to

ensure safe operation of the vehicle under

all road conditions. Your complete attention

is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow

these warnings can result in a collision and

death or serious personal injury.

The ACC system:

Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming

vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a

stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled

vehicle).

Cannot take street, traffic, and weather

conditions into account, and may be limited

upon adverse sight distance conditions.

Does not always fully recognize complex

driving conditions, which can result in wrong

or missing distance warnings.

06016V0003EM

Front Bumper Radar Location

06016V0004EM

Windshield Camera Location

160

STARTING AND OPERATING

Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop

while following a target vehicle and hold the

vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the

stop position. If the target vehicle does not

start moving within 3 minutes the parking

brake will be activated, and the ACC system

will be canceled.

You should switch off the ACC system:

When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex

driving situations (i.e., in highway

construction zones).

When entering a turn lane or highway off

ramp; when driving on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have

steep uphill or downhill slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safe

driving at a constant speed.

Activation/Deactivation

The system has four operating states:

Enabled (speed not set)

Activated (speed set)

Paused

Deactivated

Enabling / Activation

To enable the system, push and release

the

(on/off) button located on the left

side of the steering wheel.

When the system is enabled and ready to

operate, the display shows a white

vehicle icon above dashes in place of the

speed.

Setting a speed activates the system.

The display shows the icon in green with

the set speed.

Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system on when not in use is dangerous. You

could accidentally set the system or cause it

to go faster than you want. You could lose

control and have a collision. Always leave

the system off when you are not using it.

Pausing / Deactivating

With the system enabled (speed not set),

push the

(on/off) button to disable.

With the system active (speed set), push

the

(on/off) button to pause. The

display will show the icon in white with

the speed in brackets. To then deactivate

the system, push the

(on/off) button

again.

Setting The Desired Speed

The speed can be set from a minimum of

20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of

110 mph (180 km/h).

When the vehicle reaches the desired

speed, push the SET switch upward or

downward and release it to activate the

system. When the accelerator is released,

the vehicle will maintain the set speed

automatically.

07146V0010EM

On/Off Button

07146S0016EM

Enabled Icons

161

While the accelerator pedal is pressed,

the system will not be able to control the

distance between the vehicle and the one

ahead. In this case, the speed will be

determined only by the position of the

accelerator pedal.

The system will return to normal

operation as soon as the accelerator

pedal is released.

The system cannot be set:

When pressing the brake pedal.

When the brakes are overheated.

When the electric park brake has been

operated.

When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or

NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.

When the engine rpm is above a

maximum threshold.

When the vehicle speed is not within

the operational speed range.

When the ESC (or ABS or other

stability control systems) are operating

or have just operated.

When the ESC system is off.

When the Forward Collision Warning

system (if equipped) is braking

automatically.

In the event of system failure.

When the engine is OFF.

In case of obstruction of the radar

sensor (in this case the bumper area

where it is located must be cleaned).

If the system is set, the conditions

described above also cause a

cancellation or deactivation of the

system. These situations may vary

according to the conditions.

Note: The system will not be deactivated

when speeds higher than those set are

reached by pressing the accelerator

pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In

these situations, the system may not

work correctly and it is recommended to

deactivate it.

To Vary The Speed Setting

Increasing Speed

Once the system has been activated, you

can increase the speed by lifting the SET

switch. Each time it is operated, the

speed increases by 1 mph.

By holding the button up, the set speed

will increase in increments of 5 mph until

the button is released. Then, the new

speed will be set.

Decreasing Speed

Once the system has been activated, you

can decrease the speed by lowering the

SET switch. Each time it is operated, the

speed decreases by 1 mph.

By holding the button down, the set

speed will decrease in increments of

5 mph until the button is released. Then,

the new speed will be set.

Note:

Moving the SET switch allows you to

adjust the speed according to the

selected unit of measurement ("US" or

"metric") set on the Information and

Entertainment System (see dedicated

supplement).

When the unit of measurement is set

to metric, holding the SET switch the

speed will change in 10 km/h

increments.

By keeping the accelerator pedal

depressed, the vehicle can continue to

accelerate beyond the set speed. In this

case, use the SET switch to set the

speed to the vehicle’s current speed.

07146V0017EM

SET Switch

162

STARTING AND OPERATING

When you push the SET button to

reduce the speed, the braking system

intervenes automatically if the engine

brake does not slow the vehicle down

sufficiently to reach the set speed. The

device holds the set speed uphill and

downhill; however a slight variation is

entirely normal, particularly on slight

inclines.

The transmission could change to a

lower gear when driving downhill, or

when accelerating. This is normal and

necessary to maintain the set speed.

The system will disable while driving

if the brakes overheat.

Accelerating When Overtaking

When driving with ACC activated and

following a vehicle, the system will

provide an additional acceleration up to

the ACC set speed to assist in passing the

vehicle. This additional acceleration is

triggered when the driver utilizes the left

turn signal and will only be active when

passing on the left hand side.

The system detects the direction of

traffic automatically when the vehicle

passes from left-hand traffic to

right-hand traffic. In this case, the

overtaking assist function is only active

when the reference vehicle is overtaken

on the right. The additional acceleration

is deactivated when the driver uses the

right turn signal and returns to the

original lane.

Resuming The Speed

Once the system has been canceled but

not deactivated, to resume a previously

set speed, simply push the RES button

and remove your foot from the

accelerator to recall it.

The system will be set to the last stored

speed.

Before returning to the previously set

speed, bring the speed close to that

speed, then push the RES button and

release it.

Warning!

The Resume function should only be used if

traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming

a set speed that is too high or too low for

prevailing traffic and road conditions could

cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate

too sharply for safe operation. Failure to

follow these warnings can result in a collision

and death or serious personal injury.

Setting The Distance Between Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar

(short), two bars (medium), three bars

(long), or four bars (maximum).

The distances from the vehicle ahead are

proportional to speed.

The interval of time with relation to the

vehicle ahead remains constant and

varies from one second (for the short

distance one-bar setting) to two seconds

(for the maximum distance four-bar

setting).

The set distance is shown on the display

by a dedicated icon.

The setting is four (maximum) the first

time the system is used. After the

distance has been modified by the driver,

the new distance will be stored also after

the system is deactivated and

reactivated.

07146V0018EM

RES (Resume) Button

07146S0019EM

Distance Icons

163

To Decrease The Distance

Push and release the distance button to

decrease the distance setting. The

distance setting decreases by one bar

(shorter) every time the button is pushed.

The set speed is held if there are no

vehicles ahead. Once the shortest

distance has been selected, the next push

of the button will set the maximum

distance.

If a slower vehicle is detected in the same

lane, the vehicle icon on the display

illuminates from grey to white. The

system automatically adjusts the

vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance,

independently of the set speed.

The vehicle holds the set distance until:

The vehicle ahead accelerates to a

speed higher than the set speed.

The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or

the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise

Control system sensor.

The distance setting is changed.

The Adaptive Cruise Control system is

deactivated/paused.

Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by the

system is limited. The driver may apply the

brakes in all cases if needed.

If the system predicts that the braking

level is insufficient to hold the set distance,

either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is

displayed to warn the driver of approaching

the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also

emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake

immediately as necessary to hold a safe

distance from the vehicle ahead.

The driver is responsible for ensuring that

there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or

objectives along the direction of the vehicle.

Failure to comply with these precautions

may cause serious accidents and injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holding

a safe distance from the vehicle ahead

respecting the highway code in force in the

respective country.

“Stop And Go” Function

The “Stop and Go” feature allows you to

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle

ahead until the vehicle has completely

stopped. It will also restart the vehicle

automatically if the vehicle ahead drives

away within two seconds, otherwise it is

necessary to press the accelerator pedal

or push the RES button to restart.

Warning!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver

must ensure that there are no pedestrians,

vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in

a collision and death or serious personal

injury.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the set

speed is canceled if:

The (on/off) button is pushed (when

the system is on or paused).

The ignition is in STOP mode.

The system is canceled (the set speed

and distance are stored):

When the system is paused (refer to

the “Activation / Deactivation” section).

When the conditions shown in the

“Setting The Desired Speed” section

occur.

Limited Operation Warning

If the dedicated message is shown on the

display, a condition limiting the Adaptive

Cruise Control operation may have

occurred.

07146V0015EM

Distance Button

164

STARTING AND OPERATING

This could be due to an obstruction of the

vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also

be due to a fault in the system. If an

obstruction is detected, clean the area of

the windshield opposite the interior rear

view mirror, where the camera is located,

as well as the area of the front bumper

where the sensor is located. Then check

that the message has disappeared.

When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, normal operation will

resume.

Should the fault persist, contact your

authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving

The system may not work correctly in

some driving conditions (see below). The

driver must control the vehicle at all

times.

Towing A Trailer

Use of this system is not recommended

while towing a trailer.

Vehicle Not Aligned

The system may not detect a vehicle

traveling in the same lane, in the same

direction, but is not aligned. It also may

not detect a vehicle which is cutting in

from a side lane. Sufficient distance from

the vehicles ahead may not be

guaranteed in these cases.

The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and

out of the driving lane causing the vehicle

to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Steering And Curves

Driving on curves with the system set

could limit speed and acceleration to

guarantee vehicle stability, even if no

vehicles are detected ahead.

When leaving the curve, the system

resets the previously set speed.

Note:

In cases of narrow curves, the

performance of the system could be

limited. In this case, it is advisable to

deactivate the system.

The system only limits the speed

DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On Slopes

When driving on roads with a variable

incline, the system may not detect the

presence of a vehicle in the lane. System

performance could be limited according

to speed, load, traffic conditions and

steep slopes.

Lane Change

The system may not detect the presence

of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from the

vehicle which is changing lanes may not

be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the

utmost attention at all times and be

always ready to apply the brakes if

needed.

06016V0005EM

Steering And Curves

06016V0007EM

Lane Change

165

Small Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and

motorcycles) traveling near the outer

edges of the lane or which enter the lane

from curb side are not detected until they

are fully in the lane.

Sufficient distance from the vehicles

ahead may not be guaranteed in these

cases.

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

The system cannot detect the presence

of stationary vehicles or objects. For

example, the system will not operate if

the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a

vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in

that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all

times and be always ready to apply the

brakes if needed.

Objects And Vehicles Moving In

Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

The system cannot detect the presence

of objects or vehicles traveling in

opposite or crosswise directions and

consequently will not activate.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

06016V0006EM

Small Vehicles

06016V0008EM

Objects And Vehicles Moving In

Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

166

STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM

Vehicles With Rear Parking Sensors

Only

The parking sensors, located in the rear

bumper, detect obstacles while the

vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle

is detected, an acoustic alert will sound

and visual indications will be displayed on

the instrument cluster.

Engagement/Disengagement

To turn the system off, push the Park

Sensors System button located to the

left of the headlight switch. The indicator

light within the button will illuminate

when the system is turned off. Pushing

the button a second time will turn the

system back on, and the indicator light

will turn off.

The indicator light within the Park

Sensors System button will also be on in

case of system failure. If the button is

pushed with a system failure, the

indicator light will flash for

approximately five seconds. The light will

then stay on constantly.

Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON,

the Park Sensors System keeps the last

state when the engine was stopped

(activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/Deactivation

The system, when engaged, is

automatically activated by engaging the

REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by

engaging another gear.

Acoustic Signal

When REVERSE is engaged and there is

an obstacle behind the vehicle, an

acoustic signal with variable frequency

will sound.

The acoustic signal increases in

frequency as the distance between the

vehicle and the obstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomes

continuous when the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle is less than

11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the

distance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if the

distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle is unchanged.

Note: If several obstacles are detected

by the sensors, only the nearest one is

considered.

Indication On Display

The driver can select the type of warning

they would like to be displayed through

the Information and Entertainment

System. To access the function on the

main menu, select in the following order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Driver Assistance.”

3. “ParkSense.”

4. “Mode.”

5. “Sound-Display.”

07176V0001EM

Rear Sensor Locations

07176V0052NA

Park Sensors System On/Off Button

167

Visual Indications

The system indicates the presence of an

obstacle by displaying a single red arc in

the detected area, in relation to the

distance of the object and the position of

the vehicle.

If the obstacle is detected in the rear

central area, a single red arc will be

displayed as the obstacle approaches,

first constant, then flashing, in addition

to an acoustic signal.

If the obstacle is detected in the rear left

and/or right area, a single red flashing arc

will be shown in the corresponding area

on the display and the system will emit an

acoustic signal, either at frequent

intervals or constantly.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the

obstacle when a single red flashing arc is

shown on the display and the acoustic

signal becomes continuous.

If several obstacles are detected

simultaneously in the rear area, the

display will show all of them, regardless

of the area in which they were detected.

It is not possible to exit from the display

screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Fault Indication

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be

indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a

message on the instrument cluster

display. Refer to "Warning Lights And

Messages On The Instrument Panel" in

"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel"

for further information.

Messages On The Display

In case of system failure, a dedicated

message appears on the instrument

cluster for about five seconds.

Cleaning The Sensors: If the display

shows a message requiring the sensors

to be cleaned, make sure that the outer

surface and the underside of the rear

bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, mud,

ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear,

cycle the ignition to the STOP position.

Then, return it to ON. If the message is

still displayed, contact your authorized

dealer.

Audio System Not Available: If the

display shows a message that the audio

system is not available, it means that the

acoustic signal will be emitted by the

instrument panel, and not through the

vehicles speakers.

Operation With A Trailer

The operation of the Park Sensors

System is automatically deactivated

when a trailer’s electrical connector is

plugged into the vehicle. The sensors are

automatically reactivated when the

electrical connector is removed.

Note: Some conditions may affect the

performance of the Park Sensors

System:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could be

due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or

thick paint on the surface of the sensor.

The sensors may detect a false

obstacle (echo interference) due to

mechanical interference, for example

when washing the vehicle or in extreme

weather.

The signals sent by the sensors can

be altered by the presence of ultrasonic

systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems

of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the

vehicle.

System performance can be

influenced by the position of the

sensors. For example, due to a change in

the ride setting (caused by wear to the

shock absorbers or suspension), by

changing tires, overloading the vehicle or

operations that require the vehicle to be

lowered.

Be sure not to place bumper stickers

or other adhesives over the sensors as

this will affect system performance.

The presence of a trailer hitch

without a trailer. This may interfere with

the operation of the parking sensors.

Before using the Park Sensors System,

it is recommended to remove or close

the trailer hitch assembly when the

vehicle is not being used for towing.

168

STARTING AND OPERATING

Warning!

Before using the Park Sensors System, it

is strongly recommended that the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly is

disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do

so can result in injury or damage to vehicles

or obstacles because the hitch ball will be

much closer to the obstacle than the rear

fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the

continuous tone. Also, the sensors could

detect the ball mount and hitch ball

assembly, depending on its size and shape,

giving a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the vehicle.

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the Park Sensors System.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before

backing up. You are responsible for safety

and must continue to pay attention to your

surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

Caution!

The Park Sensors System is only a

parking aid and it is unable to recognize

every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily

detected or not detected at all. Obstacles

located above or below the sensors will not

be detected when they are in close

proximity.

The vehicle must be driven slowly when

using the Park Sensors System in order to

be able to stop in time when an obstacle is

detected. It is recommended that the driver

looks over his/her shoulder when using the

Park Sensors System.

Vehicles With Front And Rear Parking

Sensors — If Equipped

The parking sensors, located in the front

and rear bumpers, detect the presence of

any obstacles and warn the driver

through an acoustic signal and visual

indications will be displayed on the

instrument cluster.

Engagement/Disengagement

To turn the system off, push the Park

Sensors System switch located to the

left of the headlight switch. The indicator

light within the switch will illuminate

when the system is turned off. Pushing

the switch a second time will turn the

system back on, and the indicator light

will turn off.

07176V0003EM

Front Sensor Locations

07176V0001EM

Rear Sensor Locations

169

The indicator light within the Park

Sensors System switch will also be on in

case of system failure. If the switch is

pushed with a system failure, the

indicator light will flash for

approximately five seconds. The light will

then stay on constantly.

Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON,

the Park Sensors system keeps the last

state when the engine was stopped

(activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/Deactivation

When the REVERSE gear is engaged and

the system is on, the front and rear

sensors are activated. If the vehicle

moves from REVERSE to a forward gear,

the rear sensors are deactivated, while

the front sensors remain active until the

speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.

Note: In certain operating conditions, the

system could start detecting an obstacle

only after the vehicle has moved slightly

(a few inches).

Acoustic Signal

In the presence of an obstacle at the

front or the rear of the vehicle, an

acoustic signal with variable frequency

will sound:

The acoustic signal increases in

frequency as the distance between the

vehicle and the obstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomes

continuous when the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle is less than

11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the

distance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if the

distance between the vehicle and the

obstacle is unchanged.

Note: If the sensors detect several front

and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle

is considered. An intermittent signal will

sound if the obstacles are at the same

distance (front and rear).

When the system emits an acoustic

signal, the volume of the Information and

Entertainment System, if activated, is

automatically lowered.

Indication On Display

The driver can select the type of warning

they would like to be displayed through

the Information and Entertainment

System. To access the function on the

main menu, select in the following order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Driver Assistance.”

3. “ParkSense.”

4. “Mode.”

5. “Sound-Display.”

Visual Indications

The system indicates the presence of an

obstacle by displaying a single red arc in

the detected areas, in relation to the

distance of the object and the position of

the vehicle.

If the obstacle is detected in the front or

rear central area, a single red arc will be

displayed as the obstacle approaches,

first constant, then flashing, in addition

to an acoustic signal.

If the obstacle is detected in the front or

rear left and/or right area, a single red

flashing arc will be shown in the

corresponding area on the display and

the system will emit an acoustic signal,

either at frequent intervals or constantly.

If several obstacles are detected

simultaneously in the front and rear area,

the display will show all of them,

regardless of the area in which they were

detected.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the

obstacle when a single or several flashing

arcs are shown on the display and the

acoustic signal becomes continuous.

It is not possible to exit from the display

screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

170

STARTING AND OPERATING

Fault Indication

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be

indicated by a message on the display on

the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning

Lights And Messages On The Instrument

Panel" in "Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel" for further

information.

Messages On The Display

In case of system failure, a dedicated

message appears on the instrument

cluster for about 5 seconds.

Cleaning the front or rear sensors:If

the display shows a message requiring

the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that

the outer surface and the underside of

the front and rear bumpers are free of

debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once

these areas are clear, place the ignition in

STOP mode. Then, return it to ON mode.

If the message is still displayed, contact

your authorized dealer.

Audio system not available: If the

display shows a message that the audio

system is not available, it means that the

acoustic signal will be emitted by the

instrument panel, and not through the

vehicles speakers.

Operation With A Trailer

The operation of the rear sensors is

automatically deactivated when a

trailer’s electrical connector is plugged

into the vehicle, while the front sensors

stay active and can provide acoustic and

visual warnings. The rear sensors are

automatically reactivated when the

electrical connector is removed.

Note: Some conditions may influence

the performance of the Park Sensors

System:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could be

due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or

thick paint on the surface of the sensor.

The sensors may detect a false

obstacle (echo interference) due to

mechanical interference, for example

when washing the vehicle or in extreme

weather.

The signals sent by the sensors can

be altered by the presence of ultrasonic

systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems

of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the

vehicle.

System performance can be

influenced by the position of the

sensors. For example, due to a change in

the ride setting (caused by wear to the

shock absorbers or suspension), by

changing tires, overloading the vehicle or

operations that require the vehicle to be

lowered.

Be sure not to place bumper stickers

or other adhesives over the sensors as

this will affect system performance.

The presence of a trailer hitch

without a trailer. This may interfere with

the operation of the parking sensors.

Before using the Park Sensors System,

it is recommended to remove or close

the trailer hitch assembly when the

vehicle is not being used for towing.

Warning!

Before using the Park Sensors System, it

is strongly recommended that the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly is

disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do

so can result in injury or damage to vehicles

or obstacles because the hitch ball will be

much closer to the obstacle than the rear

fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the

continuous tone. Also, the sensors could

detect the ball mount and hitch ball

assembly, depending on its size and shape,

giving a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the vehicle.

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the Park Sensors System.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before

backing up. You are responsible for safety

and must continue to pay attention to your

surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

171

Caution!

The Park Sensors System is only a

parking aid and it is unable to recognize

every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily

detected or not detected at all. Obstacles

located above or below the sensors will not

be detected when they are in close

proximity.

The vehicle must be driven slowly when

using the Park Sensors System in order to

be able to stop in time when an obstacle is

detected. It is recommended that the driver

looks over his/her shoulder when using the

Park Sensors System.

REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /

DYNAMIC GRIDLINES

Description

The Rear Back-Up Camera is located on

the liftgate, above the rear license plate.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

Information and Entertainment System

display will show the area behind the

vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up

Camera, along with a warning message.

Rear Back-Up Camera Features

To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera

features, select “Settings” from the Main

Menu of the Information and

Entertainment System. Under “Driver

Assistance”, Rear Back-Up Camera

features can be selected:

View

Camera Delay

Dynamic Grid Lines

Selecting “View” will activate the camera

view on the display.

Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the

camera view to remain on the display

shortly after the vehicle is no longer in

REVERSE, followed by the previously

active screen.

Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will

activate the display of the dynamic

guidelines that indicate the route of the

vehicle.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

and be sure to check for pedestrians,

animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or

blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your

surroundings and must continue to pay

attention while backing up. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

07186V0001EM

Rear Back-Up Camera Location

07186V0002EM

Rear Back-Up Camera Display

172

STARTING AND OPERATING

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up

Camera should only be used as a parking

aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to

view every obstacle or object in your drive

path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must

be driven slowly when using the Rear

Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time

when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended

that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up

Camera.

Symbols And Messages On The Display

Indications On The Display

Through the Information and

Entertainment System settings, by

activating the "Camera Guidelines"

feature, guidelines can be seen on the

rear camera display. If activated, the

guidelines are positioned on the image to

highlight the width of the vehicle and the

expected reverse path based on the

steering wheel position.

The various colored areas indicate the

distance from the rear of the vehicle.

A central line indicates the center of the

vehicle to assist in rear parking

maneuvers or trailer hitch alignment.

The table below shows the approximate

distances for each area:

Area

Distance From The

Rear Of The Vehicle

Red

0–11.8

inches (0–30

cm)

Yellow

11.8 inches to 3.3 feet

(30cm–1m)

Green

3.3 feet or more (1 m

or more)

Messages On The Display

If the liftgate is opened, the camera will

not detect any obstacle behind the

vehicle. The display will show a dedicated

warning message.

Make sure the liftgate is closed by

pushing next to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the

camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is

important to keep the camera surface

clean, and free from debris.

When parking, be aware of obstacles

that may be above or below the camera

range.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

(LDW) SYSTEM

Description

The Lane Departure Warning system uses

a forward looking camera located on the

windshield to detect lane markings and

measure vehicle position within the lane

boundaries.

When one or both lane limits are

detected and the vehicle passes over one

without an activated turn signal, the

system emits a visual as well as an

acoustic signal.

If the vehicle continues to go beyond the

line of the lane without any intervention

from the driver, the surpassed line will

light up on the display (left or right) to

urge the driver to bring the vehicle back

into the limits of the lane.

Caution!

Do not tamper with nor operate on the

camera. Do not close the openings in the

aesthetic cover located under the interior

rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of

the camera, contact your authorized dealer.

The camera may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,

formation of ice layers on the windshield.

173

Camera operation may also be

compromised by the presence of dust,

condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,

by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are

driving not aligned with yours, vehicle

driving in a transverse or opposite way on

the same lane, bend with a small radius of

curvature), by road surface conditions and

by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).

Make sure the windshield is always clean.

Use specific detergents and clean cloths to

avoid scratching the windshield. The camera

operation may also be limited or absent in

some driving, traffic and road surface

conditions.

If the windshield must be replaced due to

scratches, chipping or breakage, contact

exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not

replace the windshield on your own. It is

advisable to replace the windshield if it is

damaged in the area of the camera.

System Activation/Deactivation

The system is activated/deactivated by

pushing the button located on the end of

the multifunction lever.

Note: When the engine is started, the

system maintains the operating mode

that was selected when it was turned

OFF.

Activation Conditions

Once turned on, the system becomes

active only if the following conditions are

met:

The vehicle speed is above 37 mph

(60 km/h).

The lane limit lines are visible at least

on one side.

There are suitable visibility conditions.

The road is straight or with wide radius

bends.

A suitable distance is kept from the

vehicle in front.

The turn signal is not active.

Symbols And Messages On The Display

The Lane Departure Warning system

advises the driver when the vehicle

leaves the driving lane by showing

symbols and messages on the instrument

cluster display.

When the system is active and the lane

limits have not been detected, the display

shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey

lines.

07226S0001EM

Lane Departure Warning System

Activation/Deactivation Button

07226S0002EM

Vehicle Changing Lanes

07226S0007EM

Lane Limits Not Detected

174

STARTING AND OPERATING

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A

Single Limit

When the system is active and only, for

example, the left lane limit has been

detected, the detected lane illuminates in

white on the display. The system is then

ready to provide visual warnings on the

display in the event of unintentional

exiting of the lane (turn signal not

activated) to the left.

When the system detects that the vehicle

has approached the lane line and is about

to pass it, the left line on the display

illuminates in yellow.

The system operates in the same way,

but mirrored, in the event of exiting the

right lane when only the right lane limit

has been detected.

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both

Limits

When the system is active, both lane lines

on the display illuminate in white to

indicate the successful detection of both

limits.

When lane limits are detected, the

system is ready to provide indications in

case the driver unintentionally leaves the

lane (turn signal not activated).

As the Lane Departure Warning system

detects the lane limits while the vehicle is

in motion, it will adjust the display

accordingly (from white to yellow and

yellow to white, and increase their

thickness).

If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by

an audible signal as well as the visual

indication in the instrument cluster. The

signal is emitted through the speakers on

the side of the lane limit which is being

crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding

the left line of the lane, the audible signal

will come from the speakers on the left of

the vehicle).

07226S0003EM

Left Lane Limit Detected

07226S0004EM

Left Lane Limit Approached

07226S0005EM

Both Lane Limits Detected

07226S0006EM

Right Lane Limit Approached

175

Changing The System Settings

The system's sensitivity can be set

through the Information and

Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High”

or “Low” can be selected.

To access the function, from the main

menu select the following in order:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Safety.”

3. “Lane Departure Warning.”

4. “Sensitivity.”

Limited Operation Warning

If a message appears on the display, a

condition limiting the Lane Departure

Warning system operation may have

occurred. This could be an obstruction of

the camera view, or a fault in the system.

If an obstruction is detected, clean the

area of the windshield by the interior rear

view mirror.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in

normal conditions, the system may not

function properly.

When the conditions limiting the system

are corrected, it will go back to normal

operation. Should a fault persist, contact

an authorized dealer.

System Failure Warning

If the system turns off and

appears on

the display, it means that there is a

system fault.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the

vehicle, but you are advised to contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Refueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel

type is correct.

Also, stop the engine before refueling.

Note: An inefficient catalytic converter

leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus

contributing to air pollution.

Caution!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,

even in small amounts in an emergency, as

this would damage the catalytic converter

beyond repair.

Refueling Capacity

To ensure that you fill the tank

completely, top off twice after the first

click of the fuel nozzle.

Further top-off could cause faults in the

fuel feeding system.

Refueling Procedure

The fuel filler door is unlocked when the

central door locking system is unlocked.

It is automatically locked when the

central locking system is applied.

176

STARTING AND OPERATING

Opening The Fuel Filler Door

To refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on

the point shown by the arrow.

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the

filler pipe.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts

off, before removing the nozzle, wait for

at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel

to flow inside the tank.

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten

the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear

one click. This is an indication that cap is

properly tightened.

The label indicates the fuel type

(UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).

Emergency Fuel Door Opening

In the event of an emergency, the fuel

filler door can be opened from inside the

liftgate.

Proceed as follows:

Models With Compact Spare Tire

1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load

floor.

Unlock the locking device and remove

the compact spare tire to reach the

emergency opening cable on the side of the

fuel door.

3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door

lock.

4. Open the fuel door by pressing it.

07206V0001EM

Fuel Door

07206V0002EM

Fuel Door Label

04206V0004EM

Load Floor

08066V0010EM

Cargo Area

1 — Locking Device

07266V0044EM

Release Cable

1 — Release Cable

177

Models Without Compact Spare Tire

1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load

floor.

2. Lift up the cover to reach the

emergency opening cable on the side of

the fuel door.

3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door

lock.

4. Open the fuel door by pressing it.

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or

near the vehicle when the fuel door is open

or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine is running.

This is in violation of most state and federal

fire regulations and may cause the MIL to

turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped

into a portable container that is inside of a

vehicle. You could be burned. Always place

gas containers on the ground while filling.

Note: If the filler compartment is

washed with a pressure washer, keep it at

a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm).

0604132234US

Load Floor

07226V0041EM

Cargo Box

1 — Cover

07226V0043EM

Cargo Box Opened

2 — Release Cable

178

STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration regulations, your

vehicle has a certification label affixed to

the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of

manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN). A

Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the

Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The

bar code that appears on the bottom of

the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible

weight of your vehicle including driver,

passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum

capacities of front and rear axle systems

(GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not

exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the

allowable load weight a truck can carry,

including the weight of the driver, all

passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible

load on the front and rear axles. The load

must be distributed in the cargo area so

that the GAWR of each axle is not

exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the

components in the system with the

lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or

suspension components sometimes

specified by purchasers for increased

durability does not necessarily increase

the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification

Label represents the actual tire size on

your vehicle. Replacement tires must be

equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for

the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for

your vehicle for all loading conditions up

to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as

the total weight of the vehicle with all

fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no

occupants or cargo loaded into the

vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your

vehicle on a commercial scale before any

occupants or cargo are added.

The actual total weight and the weight of

the front and rear of your vehicle at the

ground can best be determined by

weighing it when it is loaded and ready

for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed

on a commercial scale to insure that the

GVWR has not been exceeded. The

weight on the front and rear of the

vehicle should then be determined

separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and

rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show

that the GAWR of either the front or rear

axles has been exceeded but the total

load is within the specified GVWR. If so,

weight must be shifted from front to rear

or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met.

Store the heavier items down low and be

sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely

before driving.

179

Improper weight distributions can have

an adverse effect on the way your vehicle

steers and handles and the way the

brakes operate.

Caution!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR or the maximum front and rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can

break, or it can change the way your vehicle

handles. This could cause you to lose control.

Also overloading can shorten the life of your

vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and

information on limits to the type of

towing you can reasonably do with your

vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load

as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty coverage, follow the

requirements and recommendations in

this manual concerning vehicles used for

trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related

definitions will assist you in

understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight

of your vehicle. This includes driver,

passengers, cargo and tongue weight.

The total load must be limited so that you

do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to

“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification

Label” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus

the weight of all cargo, consumables, and

equipment (permanent or temporary)

loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded

and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW

is to put your fully loaded trailer on a

vehicle scale. The entire weight of the

trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating

(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total allowable weight

of your vehicle and trailer when weighed

in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of

the front and rear axles. Distribute the

load over the front and rear axles evenly.

Make sure that you do not exceed either

front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle

Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in

“Starting And Operating” for further

information.

Warning!

It is important that you do not exceed the

maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous

driving condition can result if either rating is

exceeded. You could lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

180

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force

exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer.

You must consider this as part of the load

on your vehicle.

Trailer Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height

multiplied by the maximum width of the

front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the

trailer tongue weight, just as if it were

luggage located at a hitch ball or some

other connecting point of the vehicle.

These kinds of hitches are the most

popular on the market today and they are

commonly used to tow small and medium

sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by

applying leverage through spring (load)

bars. They are typically used for heavier

loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to

the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer

axle(s). When used in accordance with the

manufacturer's directions, it provides for a

more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control thereby

enhancing towing safety. The addition of a

friction/hydraulic sway control also

dampens sway caused by traffic and

crosswinds and contributes positively to

tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway

control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for

heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be

required depending on vehicle and trailer

configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

Warning!

An improperly adjusted Weight

Distributing Hitch system may reduce

handling, stability, braking performance,

and could result in a collision.

Weight Distributing Systems may not be

compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.

Consult with your hitch and trailer

manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry

standard for the maximum trailer weight

a given trailer hitch class can tow and

should be used to assist you in selecting

the correct trailer hitch for your intended

towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

lassI-LightDuty 2,000lbs(907kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given

drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

181

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

Engine/Transmission Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.0L Engine 3,000 lbs (1360 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Refer

to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the

weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue

weight stamped on your bumper or trailer

hitch.

Consider the following items when

computing the weight on the rear axle of

the vehicle:

The tongue weight of the trailer.

The weight of any other type of cargo

or equipment put in or on your vehicle.

The weight of the driver and all

passengers.

Note: Remember that everything put

into or on the trailer adds to the load on

your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or

dealer-installed options must be

considered as part of the total load on

your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And

Loading Information” placard for the

maximum combined weight of occupants

and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new

vehicle drivetrain components, the

following guidelines are recommended:

Warning!

Improper towing can lead to a collision.

Follow these guidelines to make your trailer

towing as safe as possible:

Make certain that the load is secured in

the trailer and that it will not shift during

travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully

secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that

may be difficult for the driver to control. You

could lose control of your vehicle and have a

collision.

When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do

not overload your vehicle or trailer.

Overloading can cause a loss of control,

poor performance, or damage to brakes,

axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure, or tires.

0601085399US

Weight Distribution

182

STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety chains must always be used

between your vehicle and trailer. Always

connect the chains to the frame or hook

retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow

enough slack for turning corners.

Vehicles with trailers should not be

parked on a grade. When parking, apply the

parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the

tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always

block or "chock" the trailer wheels.

GCWR must not be exceeded.

Total weight must be distributed

between the tow vehicle and the trailer

such that the following four ratings are

not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch

utilized.

Caution!

Do not tow a trailer at all during the first

500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is

driven. The engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)

that a trailer is towed, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at

full throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier

loads.

Towing Requirements — Tires

Do not attempt to tow a trailer while

using a compact spare tire.

Do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h) when towing while using a full

size spare tire.

Proper tire inflation pressures are

essential to the safe and satisfactory

operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires”

in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

proper tire inflation procedures.

Check the trailer tires for proper tire

inflation pressures before trailer usage.

Check for signs of tire wear or visible

tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer

to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”

for the proper inspection procedure.

When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for the

proper tire replacement procedures.

Replacing tires with a higher load

carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer

Brakes

Do not interconnect the hydraulic

brake system or vacuum system of your

vehicle with that of the trailer. This could

cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

An electronically actuated trailer

brake controller is required when towing

a trailer with electronically actuated

brakes. When towing a trailer equipped

with a hydraulic surge actuated brake

system, an electronic brake controller is

not required.

Trailer brakes are recommended for

trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and

required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

Warning!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your

vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can

overload your brake system and cause it to

fail. You might not have brakes when you

need them and could have a collision.

Towing any trailer will increase your

stopping distance. When towing you should

allow for additional space between your

vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Failure to do so could result in a collision.

Caution!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own

brakes and they should be of adequate

capacity. Failure to do this could lead to

accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake

pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

183

Towing Requirements — Trailer

Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of

the trailer size, stoplights and turn

signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The TrailerTow Package may include a

four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a

factory approved trailer harness and

connector.

Note: Do not cut or splice wiring into the

vehicle’s wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all

complete to the vehicle but you must

mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Note:

Disconnect trailer wiring connector

from the vehicle before launching a boat

(or any other device plugged into

vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.

Be sure to reconnect after clear from

water area.

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice

turning, stopping, and backing up the

trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission

Select the DRIVE range when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive

strategy to avoid frequent shifting when

towing. However, if frequent shifting

does occur while in DRIVE, you can use

the AutoStick shift control to manually

select a lower gear.

Note: Using a lower gear while operating

the vehicle under heavy loading

conditions will improve performance and

extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat buildup. This

action will also provide better engine

braking.

Speed Control — If Equipped

Do not use on hilly terrain or with

heavy loads.

When using the speed control, if you

experience speed drops greater than

10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you

can get back to cruising speed.

Use speed control in flat terrain and

with light loads to maximize fuel

efficiency.

0601085400US

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Ground 6 — Right

Stop/Turn

0601085401US

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground

2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Right

Stop/Turn

7 — Running

Lamps

4 — Electric

Brakes

184

STARTING AND OPERATING

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and

transmission overheating, take the

following actions:

City Driving

In city traffic — while stopped, place

the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not

increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Temporarily turn off air conditioning.

Installing The Receiver

To properly install the receiver, follow the

directions below:

1. Retrieve the receiver from the

luggage compartment.

2. Push the receiver into the trailer hitch,

and secure by inserting the locking pin

into the trailer hitch.

3. Insert the safety split ring into the

hole on the locking pin.

Note: Ensure that the locking pin is

removed from the trailer hitch before

installing the receiver.

Connecting The Electrical System

To connect the trailer’s electrical system,

follow the directions below:

1. Remove the socket protective cover.

2. Completely insert the plug into the

socket.

Number

Function

1 Lights ground (Lights GND)

osition light, side marker

lights, and license plate light

3 Left turn signal and stop light

Right turn signal and stop

light

Removing The Receiver

When the receiver is no longer needed,

disconnect the electrical connections and

remove it from its position using the

directions below:

1. Remove the safety split ring from the

locking pin.

2. Pull the locking pin out of the trailer

hitch.

3. Remove the receiver from the trailer

hitch.

07216V0013EM

Trailer Hitch And Receiver

1 – Receiver 3 – Safety Split

Ring

2 – Locking Pin A – Trailer Hitch

07216V0014EM

Electrical Tow Connector

185

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING

Saving Fuel

Below are some suggestions which may

help you save fuel and lower the amount

of harmful emissions released into the

atmosphere.

Vehicle Maintenance

Checks and operations should be carried

out in accordance with the Maintenance

Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in

"Servicing And Maintenance" for further

information.

Tires

Check the tire pressures at least once

every four weeks: if the pressure is too

low, consumption levels increase as

resistance to rolling is higher.

Note: Tire pressure that is too high can

cause premature tire wear, reduced

control, etc.

Unnecessary Loads

Do not travel with an overloaded liftgate.

The weight of the vehicle and its

arrangement greatly affect fuel

consumption and stability.

Electric Devices

Use electrical systems only for the

amount of time needed. The rear window

defroster, additional headlights,

windshield wipers and heater blower fan

require a considerable amount of energy;

increasing the current uptake increases

fuel consumption (by up to +25% when

city driving).

Climate Control System

Using the climate control system will

increase consumption: use standard

ventilation when the temperature

outside permits.

Devices For Aerodynamic Control

The use of non-certified devices for

aerodynamic control may adversely

affect air drag and consumption levels.

Driving Style

Starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or high

revs when the vehicle is stationary; this

causes the engine to warm up more

slowly, thereby increasing fuel

consumption and emissions. It is

therefore advisable to drive off

immediately, slowly, avoiding high

speeds: by doing this the engine will

warm up more quickly.

Unnecessary Actions

Avoid revving up when starting at traffic

lights or before stopping the engine. This

action is unnecessary and causes

increased fuel consumption and

pollution.

Gear Selection

Use a high gear when traffic and road

conditions allow it. Using a low gear for

faster acceleration will increase fuel

consumption. Improper use of a high gear

increases consumption, emissions and

engine wear.

Max. Speed

Fuel consumption considerably increases

as speed increases. Maintain a constant

speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and

acceleration, which cost in terms of both

fuel consumption and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently severely affects

consumption and emissions: acceleration

should be gradual and should not exceed

the maximum torque.

Conditions Of Use

Cold Starting

Short trips and frequent cold starts will

not allow the engine to reach optimum

operating temperature. This results in a

significant increase in consumption

levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving)

and emissions.

Traffic And Road Conditions

High fuel consumption is caused by heavy

traffic, for instance when travelling in

traffic with frequent use of low gears or

in cities with many traffic lights. Winding

mountain roads and rough road surfaces

also adversely affect consumption.

Stops In Traffic

During prolonged stops (e.g. railway

crossings), turn off the engine.

186

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these may

interfere with your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can help you

to deal with critical situations

independently.

In an emergency, we recommend that you

call the phone number found in the

Warranty Book.

You may also consider contacting an

authorized dealer.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....188

BULB REPLACEMENT .........188

FUSES ...................193

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING. . . .200

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED. .203

JUMP STARTING ............206

ENGINE OVERHEATING ........208

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .209

TOW EYES ................211

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM (EARS) .............212

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .212

187

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is

located in the switch bank below the

radio screen.

Push the switch once to

turn the hazard warning

flasher on. When the

switch is activated, all

directional turn signals

will flash on and off to

warn oncoming traffic

of an emergency. Push the switch a

second time to turn the hazard warning

flashers off.

This is an emergency warning system and

it should not be used when the vehicle is

in motion. Use it when your vehicle is

disabled and is creating a safety hazard

for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek

assistance, the hazard warning flashers

will continue to operate even though the

ignition is cycled to STOP.

Caution!

Prolonged use of the hazard warning

flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery.

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System

The PBA system is designed to improve

the vehicle’s braking capacity during

emergency braking.

For further details about the Panic Brake

Assist System, refer to the "Active

Safety Systems" section in the "Safety"

chapter.

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Instructions

Before replacing a bulb, check the

contacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others of the

same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb,

always check its alignment.

When a light is not working, check that

the corresponding fuse is intact before

changing the bulb. For the location of

fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter.

Note: In some particular climate

conditions, such as low temperature,

humidity, or after washing the vehicle, a

thin condensation layer may form on the

internal surfaces of the front and rear

headlights. This condensation will

disappear after switching on the

headlights.

08016V0001EM

Hazard Warning Switch

188

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A):

They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press

the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the

side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an

authorized dealer.

189

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power

Front direction indicators

(*)

PY24W 24W

Rear Fog lights

(*)

H11 55 W

Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL)

(*)

H15 55/15W

Dipped beam headlights

(*)

H7 55W

Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W

Glove compartment light W5W 4W

Liftgate light W5W 5W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W

(*) Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights

190

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

Warning!

Only replace bulbs when the engine is off.

Also ensure that the engine is cold, to

prevent the risk of burns.

Front Light Cluster

Direction Indicators

Proceed with the directions below to

change bulbs:

1. Operating inside the engine

compartment, locate the protective

cover.

2. Remove protective cover.

3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly

counterclockwise, and then slide it off

the headlight body.

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the

bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is

correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in

the housing on the headlight body and

turn it clockwise, making sure that it is

locked correctly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster With Main Beam

Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights

To replace the bulbs of the main beam

headlights, contact an authorized dealer.

Caution!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.

Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb

life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily

surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

08026V0023EM

Protective Cover Location

08026V0006EM

Protective Cover

08026V0007EM

Bulb/Connector

191

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Courtesy Mirror Light

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the

lens, using a suitable tool.

2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the

side contacts, then insert the new bulb,

making sure that it is correctly fastened

between the contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it first on one

side and then pressing on the other side

until it clicks into place.

Glove Compartment Light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Remove the courtesy light assembly,

using a suitable tool.

3. Open protective cover up and remove

the bulb pulling out of the connector.

4. Install bulb, making sure that it is

correctly inserted fully.

5. Close the protective cover on the lens.

6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first

on one side and then pressing on the

other side until it clicks into place.

Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Open the liftgate, and remove the

liftgate lamp assembly using a suitable

tool.

2. Open protective cover up and remove

the bulb pulling out of the connector.

08026V0008EM

Sun Visor

1 — Mirror Cover

2 — Lens

08026V0009EM

Courtesy Lamp Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

08026V0010EM

Ceiling Light Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

192

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Install bulb, making sure that it is

correctly inserted fully.

4. Close the protective cover on the lens.

5. Install liftgate lamp in the correct

position, inserting it first on one side, and

then pressing on the other side until it

clicks into place.

Puddle Lights On Door Panel

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the door and remove the puddle

light assembly, using a suitable tool.

2. Open protective cover up and remove

the bulb pulling out of the connector.

3. Install bulb, making sure that it is

correctly inserted fully.

4. Close the protective cover on the lens.

5. Install puddle light in the correct

position, inserting it first on one side and

then pressing on the other side until it

clicks into place.

FUSES

General Information

The fuses protect electrical systems

against excessive current.

When a device does not work, you must

check the electrical circuit inside of the

fuse for a break/melt.

Also, please be aware that using power

outlets for extended periods of time with

the engine off may result in vehicle

battery discharge.

08026V0012EM

Puddle Light Indent

08026S0011EM

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

08036S0001EM

Blade Fuses

1 — Electrical Circuit

2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical

Circuit

3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-

cuit

193

Fuse Extracting Pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked

to the fuse box.

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,

press them, and extract the pliers pulling

upwards.

The pliers have two different ends, both

of which are specifically designed to

remove the different types of fuses

present in the vehicle:

After use, return the pliers to their proper

position by following the below

procedures:

Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs

and insert them into their housing.

Push downward on the pliers into their

housing until they click into place.

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use

an appropriate replacement fuse with the

same amp rating as the original fuse. Never

replace a fuse with another fuse of higher

amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with

metal wires or any other material. Do not

place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses

may result in serious personal injury, fire

and/or property damage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that

the ignition is off and that all the other

services are switched off and/or

disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contact

an authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safety

systems (air bag system, braking system),

power unit systems (engine system,

transmission system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Fuse Location

The fuses, which can be replaced by the

user, are grouped in two boxes below the

passenger side foot board and inside the

luggage compartment.

08036S0002EM

J-CASE Fuse

1 — Electrical Circuit

2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir-

cuit

3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-

cuit

08036V0053EM

Fuse Box

08036S0005EM

Fuse Extracting Pliers

1 — MINI fuse

2 — J-CASE fuse

194

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Control Unit Under Passenger Side

Footboard

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on

the passenger side, pulling to release the

two buttons.

Release Buttons On Footboard

1 — Footboard

2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove

the panel pulling downward.

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel

The fuses are freely accessible on the

control unit.

After replacing the fuse, make sure that

panel and footboard are correctly locked.

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.

2. Remove the control unit cover.

The fuses are freely accessible on the

control unit.

The number identifying the electrical

component corresponding to each fuse is

shown on the cover.

After replacing a fuse, make sure that

you have closed the cover correctly.

08036V0010EM

08036V0011EM

08036V0014EM

Control Unit

195

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

08036S0013EM

Passenger Side Control Unit

196

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Front power window (driver’s side) F33 25

Front

power window (passenger side) F34 25

Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control

system, alarm, power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port

F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), doors

unlock, central lock

F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15

197

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

08036V0015EM

Luggage Compartment Control Unit

198

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Receiver module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40

Hi-Fi

system F08 30

I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10

KL15/a 12V Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15

Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10

Tow bar (+15) F4 10

199

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side of the vehicle close to moving traffic.

Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is

dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack

and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never

put any part of your body under a vehicle

that is on a jack. If you need to get under a

raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

Never start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on a jack.

The jack is designed to be used as a tool

for changing tires only. The jack should not

be used to lift the vehicle for service

purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a

firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery

areas.

General Instructions

This vehicle can be equipped with a Tire

Service Kit. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” for

further information.

As an alternative to the Tire Service Kit,

the vehicle may be purchased with a

compact spare tire. Refer to “Changing

Procedure” for further information.

Jack Information And Usage

Precautions

Jack Information

The jack weighs 4.4 lb (2 kg).

The jack requires no adjustment.

The jack cannot be repaired, and in the

event of a fault it must be replaced by

another factory replacement.

No tool other than its extension lever

may be fitted on the jack.

Jack Maintenance

Prevent any dirt from depositing on

the "worm screw".

Keep the "worm screw" lubricated.

Never modify the jack.

Conditions Of Non-Use Of The Jack

Temperatures below −40°F (−40°C).

On sandy or muddy ground

On uneven ground

On steep slopes in extreme weather

conditions.

In direct contact with the engine or for

repairs under the vehicle

On boats

Changing Procedure

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level

surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side

of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the electric park brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK.

5. Cycle the ignition to STOP mode.

Block both the front

and rear of the wheel

diagonally opposite of

the jacking position. For

example, if changing the

right front tire, block the

left rear wheel.

7. Open the liftgate and lift up the load

floor using the handle.

8. Take the warning triangle and position

it at a suitable distance from the vehicle

to warn oncoming vehicles.

200

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

9. Unscrew the locking plate and take

out the compact spare tire and the air

compressor.

10. Remove the damaged wheel by using

the wheel wrench to loosen the bolts by

about one turn.

11. Position the jack under the vehicle,

near the wheel to be changed, taking care

not to damage the plastic body panel.

12. Lift the extension lever on the

wrench.

13. Rotate the extension lever

clockwise until the round pin on the jack

engages in the hole in the lifting block

located about six inches (15 cm) from the

outside edge of the body. The lifting

points are marked by triangles

visible

on the plastic body panel.

Caution!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by

jacking on locations other than those

indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this

vehicle.

14. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack

screw clockwise, using the swivel wrench.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just

clears the surface and enough clearance

is obtained to install the compact spare

tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum

stability.

08066V0010EM

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

1 — Locking Plate

08066V0013EM

Jacking Location

2 — Extension Lever

3 — Wrench Head

4 — Jack

5 — Lifting Block

09056V0001EM

Jacking Point Indicators

201

Warning!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary

can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip

off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise

the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

15. Remove the five wheel bolts and

take the wheel off.

16. Make sure the contact surfaces

between compact spare tire and hub are

clean so that the fastening bolts will not

come loose.

17. Fit the compact spare tire by

inserting the first wheel bolt for two

threads into the hole closest to the valve.

Caution!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the

valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could

be damaged if the spare tire is mounted

incorrectly.

18. Take the wheel wrench and tighten

the wheel bolts.

19. Inflate the compact spare tire by

removing the cap from its inflation valve

and screwing on the compressor inflation

hose fitting.

20. Make sure that the switch on the

compressor is in the O (off) position,

open the liftgate and insert the plug into

the power socket in the cargo area, or on

the center console and start the engine.

Place the on/off switch in the I (on)

position.

21. Inflate the compact spare tire to a

pressure of 43.5 psi (3 bar).

Note: If spare tire is over inflated, be

sure to lower the psi in the tire to the

recommended amount by using the

deflation button on the air compressor.

22. Operate the wheel wrench on the

jack to lower the vehicle.

23. Remove the jack.

24.

Use the wheel wrench to fully tighten

the bolts, passing alternately from one bolt

to the diagonally opposite one.

Warning!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully

until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious

injury.

To obtain a more accurate reading, it is

advisable to check the pressure of the

compact spare tire on the pressure

gauge with the compressor off.

Note: Do not stow the deflated tire in

the compact spare tire location.

The compressor was designed for

inflating the compact spare tire. Do not

use it for inflating mattresses, rafts, etc.

Note: Spare tires are intended for

temporary use only.

Have the full-sized tire repaired or

replaced, as soon as possible.

Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

08066V0011EM

Attaching Compressor To Tire

6 — Air Compressor

7 — Pressure Gauge

8 — Power Button

202

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF

EQUIPPED

Description

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first

emergency repair using the Tire Service

Kit located in the rear storage area under

the load platform.

1. Stop the vehicle in a position where

you can repair the tire safely. You should

be as far as possible from the side of the

road, and in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic. Turn on

the hazard warning flashers, remove the

safety triangle from the luggage

compartment, and place it at a suitable

distance from the vehicle to make other

drivers aware of your presence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the

wheel with the deflated tire) is in a

position that is near to the ground. This

will allow the tire repair kit hoses to reach

the valve stem and keep the tire service

kit flat on the ground.

3. Place the gear selector in PARK (P).

4. Apply the electric park brake and turn

the engine OFF.

To access the Tire Service Kit, open the

liftgate and lift the load floor.

The Tire Service Kit consists of:

Sealant cartridge containing the

sealing fluid

Filler Tube

Air compressor, complete with

pressure gauge and connectors

Adhesive label with the writing "Max.

50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a

position easily visible to the driver (eg. on

the dashboard) after repairing the tire

An instruction pamphlet for reference

in prompt and correct use of the Tire

Service Kit, which must be then given to

the personnel dealing with the

sealant-treated tire

A pair of protective gloves

Some adaptors, for inflating different

elements

Note:

The sealing fluid is effective with

external temperatures of between

-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

The sealing fluid has an expiration

date.

04206V0004EM

Load Floor

08066V0002EM

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Cartridge

2 — Filling Hose

3 — Adhesive Label

4 — Air Compressor

203

Inflation Procedure

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of

the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough

off the road to avoid the danger of being hit

when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from driving

with extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from driving on

a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of the

tire or the wheel.

KeepTire Service Kit away from open

flames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in

a collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure

to follow these warnings can result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of Tire

Service Kit to come in contact with hair,

eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is

harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed

through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and

respiratory irritation. Flush immediately

with plenty of water if there is any contact

with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon

as possible, if there is any contact with

clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains

latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,

consult a physician immediately. KeepTire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If

swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water.

Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as

follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake.

2. Connect the hose to the sealant

cartridge containing the sealing liquid.

Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the

filler tube and tighten the fitting on the

tire valve.

3. Make sure the power switch of the

compressor is in the off position (O).

4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in

the center console, then start the engine.

08066V0004EM

Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire

1 — Sealant Cartridge

2 — Filler Hose

4 — Air Compressor

5 — Hose

6 — Sealant Cartridge Connector

08066V0006EM

Inserting Plug Into Outlet

204

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Start the compressor by placing the

power switch in the on position (I).

6. Inflate the tire to a pressure of at

least 32 psi (2.2 bar). Refer to “Tires” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for more

information. In order to obtain a more

precise reading, check the pressure value

on pressure gauge with the compressor

off.

7. If the pressure is not at least 26 psi

(1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the

compressor from the valve and power

outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards

approximately five tire turns in order to

distribute the sealing fluid inside the tire

evenly, and then repeat the inflation

operation.

8. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles

(8 km), stop, engage the electric park

brake, and recheck the tire pressure.

9. If the pressure is less than 19 psi

(1.3 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and

see an authorized dealer.

10. If a pressure value of at least 19 psi

(1.3 bar) is detected, restore the correct

pressure (with engine running and

electric park brake engaged), and drive

immediately with great care to an

authorized dealer.

Warning!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire

repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired

or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do

not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is

repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this

warning can result in injuries that are serious

or fatal to you, your passengers, and others

around you. Have the tire checked as soon as

possible at your authorized dealer.

11. Apply the adhesive label from the

sealant bottle where it can be easily seen

by the driver as a reminder that the tire

has been treated with a Tire Service Kit,

as well as not to exceed the speed

restriction for the treated tire.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker

to the padded area on the steering wheel.

Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the

padded area on the steering wheel is

dangerous because the air bag may not

operate (deploy) normally resulting in

serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the

sticker to areas where warning lights or the

speedometer cannot be viewed.

Note: Only use original sealant

cartridges, which can be purchased at an

authorized dealer.

Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure

The compressor can also be used to

check and, if necessary, restore the tire

pressure.

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that the power switch is in

the O (off) position.

2. Connect the hose directly to the valve

on the tire to be inflated.

3. Insert the plug into the socket in the

passenger compartment or in the cargo

area and start the engine.

08066V0005EM

Air Compressor

7 — Power Switch

8 — Pressure Gauge

205

4. Start the compressor by putting the

power switch to I (on). As soon as the

correct pressure is reached, put the

power switch to O (off).

If the tire is over inflated, reduce the

pressure by pushing the PSI/BAR button

and releasing it when the correct

pressure is reached.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it

can be jump started using a set of jumper

cables and a battery in another vehicle, or

by using a portable battery booster pack.

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

improperly, so please follow the

procedures in this section carefully.

Note: When using a portable battery

booster pack, follow the manufacturer's

operating instructions and precautions.

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-starting

procedure could result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack

or any other booster source with a system

voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to

the battery, starter motor, alternator or

electrical system may occur.

Remote Battery Connection Posts

The remote posts of the battery for jump

starting can be found inside the engine

compartment. The battery itself is

located in the luggage compartment.

The negative terminal (-) is positioned

next to the passenger side hood lock.

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery.

The resulting electrical spark could cause

the battery to explode and could result in

serious injury. Only use the specific ground

point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

08066V0008EM

Air Compressor And Components

5 — Hose

7 — Power Switch

8 — Pressure Gauge

9 — PSI/BAR Button

08076V0006EM

Remote Negative Post Location

206

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

The positive post (+) can be accessed by

removing the cover, and opening the

protective flap.

To carry out the operation, you need to

have the correct cables to connect to the

battery of another vehicle or a portable

battery booster pack to the remote posts

of the discharged battery. Usually, these

cables have terminals at the ends and are

identified by different sheath colors (red

= positive, black = negative).

Jump Starting Procedure

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-starting

procedure could result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures could

result in damage to the charging system of

the booster vehicle or the discharged

vehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, place

the gear selector to PARK, then cycle the

ignition to OFF.

2. Turn off all electrical features in the

vehicle.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start

the battery, park the vehicle within the

jumper cables reach, apply the parking

brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as

this could establish a ground connection and

personal injury could result.

Cable Connection

Proceed as follows to perform a jump

starting procedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) post of

the vehicle with the discharged battery

2. Connect the opposite end of the

positive (+) jumper cable to the positive

(+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the

jumper cable to the negative (-) post of

the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the

negative (-) jumper cable to the remote

negative (-) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery.

The resulting electrical spark could cause

the battery to explode and could result in

serious injury. Only use the specific ground

point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has

the booster battery, let the engine idle a

few minutes, and then start the engine in

the vehicle with the discharged battery. If

using a portable battery booster pack,

before starting the vehicle, wait a few

seconds after completing the connection.

08076V0002EM

Protective Flap

08076V000118

Remote Positive Post Location

207

Cable Disconnection

Once the engine is started, remove the

connection cables in reverse sequence,

as described below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the

jumper cable from the remote negative (-)

post of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the

jumper cable from the negative (-) post of

the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the

positive (+) jumper cable from the

positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the

jumper cable from the positive (+) post of

the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to

start your vehicle, you should have the

battery and charging system inspected at

an authorized dealer.

Caution!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power

outlets draw power from the vehicle’s

battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular

phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough without engine operation, the

vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently

to degrade battery life and/or prevent the

engine from starting.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing,

towing or coasting downhill.

Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an

automatic transmission by pushing it.

Caution!

Failure to follow the directions in this

section will cause damage to the vehicle.

Accessories plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s

battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular

phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough without engine operation, the

vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently

to degrade battery life and/or prevent the

engine from starting.

ENGINE OVERHEATING

Engine overheating may occur in

situations such as (but not limited to)

extreme environmental temperatures or

frequent engine stops/starts. If the

engine becomes overheated, the Engine

Temperature Warning Light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate along

with a dedicated message. Refer to

"Warning Lights And Messages On The

Instrument Panel" in the "Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel" for more

information.

In any of the following situations, you can

reduce the potential for overheating by

taking the appropriate action.

On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place

the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not

increase engine idle speed.

Note: There are steps that you can take

to slow down an impending overheat

condition:

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn

it off. The A/C system adds heat to the

engine cooling system and turning the

A/C off can help remove this heat.

You can also turn the temperature

control to maximum heat, the mode

control to floor and the blower control to

high. This allows the heater core to act

as a supplement to the radiator and aids

in removing heat from the engine cooling

system.

208

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open the

hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is

hot.

Caution!

Driving with a hot cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge

reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle

the vehicle with the air conditioner turned

off until the pointer drops back into the

normal range. If the pointer remains on the

“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call

for service.

Note:

If the cooling fan does not operate

while the engine is running, the engine

temperature will increase. Stop the

engine and contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine continues to overheat or

frequently overheats, have the cooling

system inspected. The engine could be

seriously damaged unless repairs are

made. Contact an authorized dealer.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for

towing a disabled vehicle using a

commercial towing service.

Caution!

The vehicle should be transported with all

four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed

of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid

towing with only the front (or rear) wheels

lifted. When towing with only the front (or

rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging

the body, it could damage the transmission.

Do not use sling-type equipment when

towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flatbed

truck, do not attach to front or rear

suspension components. Damage to your

vehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is

released, and remain released, while being

towed.

Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a

Anti-Lift Protection system, you will need

to disable the system prior to towing by

pushing the button located on the

overhead console. Refer to “Anti-Lift

Protection — If Equipped” in “Getting To

Know Your Vehicle” for further

information.

The operators of the assistance vehicle

must be informed with regard to the

vehicle's minimum height from ground in

order to avoid contact between the ends

of the bumpers with the equipment of the

breakdown truck.

The following image illustrates the front

and rear attachment corners of the

vehicle, to be taken into consideration

when loading the vehicle on the

commercial towing vehicle.

08126V0001EM

Front And Rear Loading Angles

209

AWD Models

A — Front Loading Angle 21.7°

— Rear Loading Angle 18.3°

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle

with all four wheels OFF the ground on

the flatbed of a commercial towing

vehicle.

Caution!

DO NOTflat tow this vehicle. Damage to

the drivetrain will result.

DO NOTdolly tow this vehicle. Use of a

towing dolly can cause significant damage

to your vehicle.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above

requirements can cause severe transmission

damage. Damage from improper towing is

not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

210

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

TOW EYES

If the vehicle has been in an accident or

has broken down, a tow eye is provided in

the tools container located inside the

luggage compartment for vehicle towing.

Towing is meant only for short distances

on a paved road surface.

Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front grille or

rear bumper (if equipped), pushing on the

upper part.

2. Remove the tow eye from its housing

in the luggage compartment and carefully

clean the threaded housing on the vehicle

before using it.

3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place

(about 11 turns).

Note: The largest work angle of a tow

cable to fix on the tow eye must not

exceed 15°.

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow

eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains

may break, causing serious injury or death.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow

straps may break or become disengaged,

causing serious injury or death.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usage

may cause components to break resulting in

serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusively for

roadside assistance operations. Only use the

tow eye with an appropriate device in

accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar

or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short

distance to the nearest service location.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow

vehicles off the road or where there are

obstacles.

In compliance with the above conditions,

towing with a tow eye must take place with

two vehicles (one towing, the other towed)

aligned as much as possible along the same

center line. Damage to your vehicle may

occur if these guidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that can

tow vehicles with low ground clearances as

extensive damage can result by using a

standard tow truck platform.

08136V0001EM

Front Tow Eye Cap

08136V0003EM

Rear Tow Eye Cap

08136V0002EM

Work Angle Of Tow Cable

211

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an

Enhanced Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint

Systems” in “Safety” for further

information on the Enhanced Accident

Response System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose

of an EDR is to record data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed under certain crash

or near crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a road

obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint

Systems” in “Safety” for further

information on the Event Data Recorder

(EDR).

212

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the

performance of the vehicle to be

maintained over time, as well as limited

running costs and safeguarding the

efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING .......214

ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......219

BATTERYRECHARGING ........222

DEALER SERVICE ............223

RAISING THE VEHICLE .........230

TIRES ...................230

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .245

STORING THE VEHICLE ........246

BODYWORK...............247

INTERIORS ................249

213

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial for

guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle

under the best conditions.

For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned

a series of checks and services for your

vehicle at fixed intervals based on

distance and time, as described in the

Scheduled Servicing Plan.

Before each service, it is always

necessary to carefully follow the

instructions in the Scheduled Servicing

Plan (e.g. periodically check level of

fluids, tire pressure, etc.).

Scheduled Servicing is offered by an

authorized dealer according to a set time

schedule. If, during each operation, in

addition to the ones scheduled, the need

arises for further replacements or

repairs, these may be carried out with the

owner’s explicit consent only.

Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are

required by the manufacturer. Failure to

have them carried out may invalidate the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

You are advised to inform your

authorized dealer of any small operating

irregularities without waiting for the next

service.

214

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:

Engine coolant level.

Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible).

Windshield washer fluid level.

Tire inflation pressure and condition.

Operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshield washing/wiping system and positioning/wear of wiper blades.

Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and top off if required:

Engine oil level.

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of the following conditions:

Dusty roads.

Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.

Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity.

In the event of a long period of inactivity.

The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan:

Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements

(sleeves/bushes, etc.).

Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte).

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is operated

predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

215

Maintenance Plan (2.0L T4 MAir Engine)

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years

123456789101112131415

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.

Check the tire service kit recharge condition and expire date

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning

lights, etc.)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels

(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool)

and, if equipped, engine oil degradation

(2)

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody

protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),

rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ●●●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ●●●●●●●●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and

adjust nozzles, if necessary

●●●●●●●●

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

(2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

216

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years

123456789101112131415

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

● ● ● ● ●●●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake

pads and operation of pad wear indicators

●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the

accessory drive belt(s)

●●● ●●● ●●● ●●●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter

(3)

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s

(4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ●●●●●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●

Change the brake fluid

(6)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in

the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles (16,000 km).

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas

and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage,

the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

217

Thousands of miles

100

110

120

130

140

150

Years

123456789101112131415

Thousands of kilometers

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement

* ●●

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

*The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.

This could cause an accident.

218

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels

2.0L T4 MAir Engine

1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

3 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover

09026V0002EM

219

Engine Oil

The engine oil level can be seen on the

instrument cluster display every time the

engine is started, or on the Information

and Entertainment system display by

activating on the main menu (MENU

button) the following functions in

sequence:

1. “Apps”

2. “My Car”

3. “Oil Level”

Check on the display using the 6 notches

that the oil level is between the MIN and

MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches

MAX level.

If the oil level is close to or below the MIN

mark, add oil gradually through the filler,

(refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication

Update On Display” in this section)

considering that each notch shown on the

display corresponds to approximately

8.8floz(250ml).

Caution!

Make sure not to add too much oil when

topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess

may damage the engine. Have the vehicle

checked. Never exceed the MAX level when

topping off engine oil.

Caution!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately on

the display after topping off. Consequently,

wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the

display and follow the procedure below.

Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and

tighten to proper torque whenever it is

removed to add oil to engine. Never run

the engine with cap removed this could

cause oil to leak from engine.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update

On Display

If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order

to ensure the correct indication of the oil

level on the display, leave the vehicle on

flat ground with the engine running for

approximately five minutes (temperature

higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the

engine off. Then, start the engine again,

and idle it for about five minutes.

Note: If you have added the specified

amount of oil and the indicator is not

reading “Full”, please contact an

authorized dealer.

Warning!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for

the engine to cool down before loosening the

filler cap, particularly for vehicles with

aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk

of burns!

Caution!

The oil level must never exceed the MAX

mark.

If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last

notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,

go to an authorized dealer as soon as

possible to have the oil in excess removed.

Do not add oil with specifications

different from those of the oil already in the

engine.

Used engine oil and oil filters contain

substances which are harmful to the

environment. To change the oil and filters,

we advise you to contact an authorized

dealer.

220

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Engine Coolant Fluid

If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of

the reservoir and add the fluid described

in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Washer Fluid For Windshield/

Headlights

If the level is too low, remove reservoir

cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid

described in "Technical Specifications".

Note: The headlight washing system will

not work if the liquid level is low

(situation indicated by the symbol on the

instrument cluster display). The

windshield washer will keep working.

Brake Fluid

Check that the fluid is at the maximum

level. If the fluid level in the tank is low,

contact your authorized dealer to have

the system checked.

Automatic Transmission Activation

System Oil

The transmission control oil level should

only be checked at your authorized

dealer.

Useful Advice For Extending The Life

Of Your Battery

To avoid draining your battery and make

it last longer, observe the following

instructions:

When you park the vehicle, ensure that

the doors and liftgate are closed properly

to prevent any lights from remaining on

inside the passenger's compartment.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,

hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on

for a long time when the engine is not

running.

Before performing any operation on

the electrical system, disconnect the

negative battery cable.

If you wish to install electrical

accessories after purchasing the vehicle

that require permanent electrical supply

(e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which

influence the electrical supply

requirements, contact your authorized

dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate

the overall electrical consumption.

Caution!

If the charge level remains under 50% for a

long time, the battery may be damaged by

sulphation, reducing its capacity and

efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is

also more prone to the risk of freezing (at

temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).

Note: After the battery is disconnected,

the steering must be initialized. The

warning light on the instrument panel

switches on to indicate this. To carry out

this procedure, simply turn the steering

wheel all the way from one end to the

other, and then turn it back to the central

position.

Battery

The battery does not require the

electrolyte to be topped up with distilled

water. A periodic check carried out at an

authorized dealer, however, is necessary

to check efficiency.

Follow the battery manufacturer's

instructions for maintenance.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with

another original battery with the same

specifications. Follow the battery

manufacturer’s instructions for

maintenance.

Warning!

Battery acid is a corrosive solution and

can burn or even blind you. Do not allow

battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or

clothing. Do not lean over a battery when

attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or

on skin, flush the area immediately with

large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump

Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for

further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the

battery. Do not use a booster battery or any

other booster source with an output greater

than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to

touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after handling.

221

Note: It will not be possible to open the

liftgate with a key or by pressing the

button in the passenger compartment

when the battery is disconnected. So,

always position the manual liftgate

opening strap on the liftgate lock before

disconnecting the battery. The procedure

is described in the “Liftgate Emergency

Opening” procedure described in the

“Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To

Know Your Vehicle”.

BATTERY RECHARGING

Important Notes

Warning!

Never charge or recharge a frozen

battery: it may explode because of the

nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.

At all times while charging or recharging

the battery, make sure that any sparks or

open flames are kept sufficiently far away

from the battery.

Note:

Before using the charging device,

always make sure that it is appropriate

for the installed battery, with constant

voltage (below 14.8 V) and low

amperage (maximum 15 A).

Recharge the battery in a well

ventilated environment.

Before using any devices to charge or

to maintain the charge of the battery,

carefully follow the instructions

provided with the device in order to

properly and safely connect it to the

vehicle battery.

You can recharge the battery without

disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's

electrical system.

To reach the battery, remove the load

floor inside the liftgate.

Locate the battery access panel under

the load floor.

Remove the protective cover and

connect the positive cable terminal of the

charger (usually red) to the positive

terminal (+) of the battery.

04206V0004EM

Load Floor

09036V0005EM

Battery Access Panel

222

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Connect the negative terminal of the

charger (usually black) to nut next to the

negative terminal (-) of the battery.

The vehicle is equipped with an

Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), which is

able to measure the charge and discharge

voltage and calculate the charge level

and the general condition of the battery.

The sensor is placed next to the negative

terminal (-) of the battery.

For a correct charge/discharge

procedure, the charge voltage must go

through the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow the

instructions on the user's manual to

completely recharge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turn the

charger off before disconnecting it from

the battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of

the battery charger and then the red

cable terminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of the

positive terminal of the battery and the

access cover to the battery

compartment.

Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is

used with the battery fitted on the

vehicle, before connecting it disconnect

both cables of the battery itself. Do not

use a "quick-type" battery charger to

provide the starting voltage.

DEALER SERVICE

The following pages contain instructions

on the required maintenance from the

technical personnel who designed the

vehicle.

In addition to these specific maintenance

instructions specified for routine

scheduled servicing, there are other

components which may require periodic

maintenance or replacement over the

vehicle’s life cycle.

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Level Check

To ensure correct engine lubrication, the

oil must always be kept at the prescribed

level (see "Engine Compartment" in this

chapter).

Check the oil level at regular intervals, for

example every 1,864 miles (3,000 km).

Full operating temperature must be

reached. The vehicle must also be parked

on as level a surface as possible.

The engine oil level can be checked using

the Information and Entertainment

system. To access the function, activate

the main menu (MENU button) and select

the following options in sequence:

1. “Applications”

2. “My Car”

3. “Oil level”

09036V0002EM

Battery

1 — Protective Cover

2 — Negative Post (Nut)

223

Changing The Engine Oil

See the "Maintenance Plan" for the

correct servicing intervals.

Choice Of Engine Oil Type

To ensure optimal performance and

maximum protection in all operating

conditions, it is advised to use certified

engine oils. Refer to "Fluid And

Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications"

for further information.

Additives For Engine Oil

It is strongly recommended not to use

additives (other than leak detection dyes)

with the engine oil.

The engine oil is a product designed

specially for the vehicle and its

performance may be deteriorated

through the use of further additives.

Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters

For the disposal of the engine oil and

filters, contact the appropriate body to

determine local regulations.

Note: Used engine oil disposed of

incorrectly may seriously harm the

environment.

Engine Oil Filter

Replacing the Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter must be replaced

each time the engine oil is changed. It is

advised to replace it with a genuine spare

part, specifically designed for this

vehicle.

Air Filter

Replacing the Air Cleaner

See the "Maintenance Plan" for the

correct servicing intervals. It is advised to

replace it with a genuine spare part,

specifically designed for this vehicle.

Air Conditioning System Maintenance

To ensure the best possible performance,

the air conditioning system must be

checked and undergo maintenance at an

authorized dealer at the beginning of the

summer.

Caution!

Do not use chemicals to clean the air

conditioning system, since the internal

components may be damaged. This kind of

damage is not covered by warranty.

Replace The Cabin Air Filter

See the "Maintenance Plan" for the

correct servicing intervals. For cleaner

replacement, contact an authorized

dealer.

Warning!

Use only refrigerants and compressor

lubricants approved by the manufacturer for

your air conditioning system. Some

unapproved refrigerants are flammable and

can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved

refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer

to Warranty Information Book, located in

your owner’s information kit, for further

warranty information.

Lubricating Moving Parts Of The

Bodywork

Ensure that the locks and bodywork

junction points, including components

such as the seat guides, door hinges (and

rollers), liftgate and hood are periodically

lubricated with lithium-based grease to

ensure correct, silent operation and to

protect them from rust and wear.

Thoroughly clean the components,

eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.

After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and

grease. Also pay particular attention to

the hood closing devices, to ensure

correct operation. During operations on

the hood, to be carried out with the

engine cold, also remember to check,

clean and lubricate the locking, release

and safety devices.

224

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Lubricate the external lock barrels twice

a year. Apply a small amount of

high-quality lubricant directly into the

lock barrel.

If necessary, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Windshield Wiper

Periodically clean the windshield and rear

window and rubber profile of the

windshield wiper blades, using a sponge

or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive

detergent. This eliminates the salt or

impurities accumulated when driving.

Prolonged operation of the windshield

window wipers with dry glass may cause

the deterioration of the blades, in

addition to abrasion of the surface of the

glass. To eliminate the impurities on the

dry glass, always operate the windshield

washers.

In the event of very low outdoor

temperatures, below zero degrees,

ensure that the movement of the rubber

part in contact with the glass is not

obstructed. Use a suitable deicing

product to release it if required.

Avoid using the windshield wipers to

remove frost or ice.

Also avoid contact of the rubber profile

of the blades with petroleum derivatives

such as engine oil, gas, etc.

Warning!

Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is

a serious hazard, because visibility is

reduced in bad weather conditions.

Note: The life of the windshield wiper

blades varies according to the usage

frequency. In any case, it is advised to

replace the blades approximately once a

year. When the blades are worn, noise,

marks on the glass or streaks of water

may be noticed. In the presence of these

conditions, clean the windshield wiper

blades or, if necessary, replace them.

Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades

("Service Position" Function)

The "service position" function allows the

driver to replace the windshield wiper

blades more easily. It is also

recommended to activate this function

when it is snowing and to make it easier

to remove any dirt deposits in the area

where the blades are normally

positioned, when washing.

Note: If the windshield wipers are raised

while not in the “service position,” it is

possible to damage the hood.

Activation Of The Function

To activate this function, disable the

windshield wiper before cycling the

ignition to STOP.

This function can only be activated within

two minutes of cycling the ignition to

STOP.

To activate this function, move the lever

upward for at least three seconds.

Function Deactivation

The function is deactivated if:

More than two minutes passes before

cycling the ignition to the STOP position

after having raised the lever and putting

the wipers into service position.

The ignition is cycled to the ON and the

windshield wiper control is used.

09046V0001EM

Windshield Wiper Stalk

225

If, after using the function, the ignition is

set back to ON with the blades in a

position other than rest position (at the

base of the windshield), they will only

return to rest position following a

command given using the stalk (stalk

upwards, into unstable position) or when

a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.

Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades

Proceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, push tab of the

attachment spring and remove the blade

from the arm.

2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in

the dedicated housing in the arm and

checking that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto the

windshield.

Note: Do not operate the windshield

wiper with the blades lifted from the

windshield.

Front/Rear Windshield Washers

The window washer nozzles are fixed. If

there is no jet of fluid, first check that

there is fluid in the reservoir. Refer to

“Engine Compartment” in this chapter for

the reservoir location.

Then, check that the nozzle holes are not

clogged; use a needle to unblock them if

necessary.

Exhaust System

Adequate maintenance of the engine

exhaust system represents the best

protection against leaks of carbon

monoxide into the passenger

compartment.

If an unusual noise from the exhaust or

the presence of smoke in the passenger

compartment is identified, or if the

underbody or rear section of the vehicle

have been damaged, have the entire

exhaust system and adjoining bodywork

areas checked at your authorized dealer

to identify any components which are

broken, damaged, worn or have moved

from their correct fitting position.

Open welding or loose connections may

permit exhaust gas to enter the

passenger compartment.

Have the exhaust system checked every

time the vehicle is raised. Replace the

components where necessary (for these

operations, contact an authorized

dealer).

In normal operating conditions, the

catalytic converter does not require

maintenance. To ensure that it operates

correctly, however, and prevent it from

getting damaged, it is extremely

important that the engine operates

perfectly.

0604132236US

Wiper Release Tab

09046V0003EM

Front Windshield Washers

09046V0004EM

Rear Windshield Washer

226

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

To minimize the risk of damaging the

catalytic converter, proceed as follows:

Do not stop the engine or deactivate

the ignition with gear engaged and

vehicle in motion.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

bump starting.

Do not persist in using the vehicle if

idling is very irregular or the operating

conditions are very notably irregular.

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They

contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is

colorless and odorless. Breathing it can

make you unconscious and can eventually

poison you.

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if

you park over materials that can burn. Such

materials might be grass or leaves coming

into contact with your exhaust system. Do

not park or operate your vehicle in areas

where your exhaust system can contact

anything that can burn.

Cooling System

Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open the

hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never open a cooling system pressure cap

when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry

away from the radiator cooling fan when the

hood is raised. The fan starts automatically

and may start at any time, whether the

engine is running or not.

When working near the radiator cooling

fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn

the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is

temperature controlled and can start at any

time the ignition is in the ON mode.

Coolant Check

Your vehicle has two cooling systems and

they both need to be checked to ensure

they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the

“Engine Compartment” section for the

locations.

Check the engine coolant and intercooler

coolant level every oil change or before

long trips.

If there are impurities in the engine

coolant, the system must be drained,

flushed and refilled: contact an

authorized dealer.

Check the front part of the condenser to

check for any build-up of insects, leaves

or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it

by spraying delicately with water.

Check the hoses of the engine/

intercooler cooling system to ensure that

the rubber has not deteriorated and that

there are no cracks, tears, cuts or

obstructions in the expansion tank side

and radiator side connectors. Should

there be any doubt regarding leaks from

the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are

required), have the seal checked at an

authorized dealer.

With the engine off and at normal

operating temperature, check that the

cooling system radiator cap is closed

properly.

Warning!

Do not open hot engine cooling system.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when

the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or

remove the cap to cool an overheated

engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in

the cooling system. To prevent scalding or

injury, do not remove the pressure cap while

the system is hot or under pressure.

Do not use a pressure cap other than the

one specified for your vehicle. Personal

injury or engine damage may result.

Note: Before removing the coolant

reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool

down.

227

Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The

Engine/Intercooler Coolant

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty,

have cleaning and flushing carried out at

an authorized dealer.

See the "Maintenance Plan" for the

correct servicing intervals.

Note:

For topping up, refer to "Fluids And

Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications"

for proper coolant specifications.

Do not use pure water, alcohol-based

coolants, corrosions inhibitors or

additional anti-rust products because

they may be incompatible with the

engine coolant and cause the clogging

of the radiator. The use of propylene

glycol-based coolant is also not

recommended.

Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap

To prevent loss of engine coolant, make

sure that the expansion tank cap is

closed. If it is open, screw it completely

until you reach/hear the click.

Periodically check the cap and clean it

from any foreign bodies that may have

deposited on the external surface.

Warning!

Never add coolant with the engine hot or

overheated.

Do not attempt to cool an overheated

engine by loosening or removing the cap. The

heat causes a considerable increase in

pressure in the cooling system.

To prevent damage to the engine, only

use the engine cooling circuit caps provided.

Disposal of Used Coolant

Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is

subject to legal requirements. Contact

the appropriate body to determine local

regulations.

Note:

To prevent the fluid from being

ingested by children or animals, do not

keep it in open containers or pour it on

the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor

immediately. Eliminate any traces of

fluid from the ground immediately.

When the vehicle stops after a short

trip, steam may be seen coming out

from front of the hood. This is a normal

phenomenon which is due to the

presence of rain, snow or a lot of

moisture on the surface of the radiator.

With engine and system cold, do not

top up with coolant beyond the

maximum level indicated on the

reservoir in the engine compartment.

Braking System

In order to guarantee the efficiency of

the braking system, periodically check its

components; for this operation, contact

an authorized dealer.

See the "Maintenance Plan" for the

correct servicing intervals.

Note: Driving with your foot resting on

the brake pedal may compromise its

efficiency, increasing the risk of

accidents. When driving, never keep your

foot on the brake pedal and don’t put

unnecessary strain on it to prevent the

brakes from overheating. Excess pad

wear may cause damage to the braking

system.

When an insufficient oil level is

detected, contact an authorized dealer

to have the system checked.

Always keep the cap of the brake

fluid reservoir (in the engine

compartment) completely closed.

228

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Warning!

Use only manufacturer's recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”

in “Technical Specifications” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake

fluid can severely damage your brake

system and/or impair its performance. The

proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is

also identified on the original factory

installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

To avoid contamination from foreign

matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid

or fluid that has been in a tightly closed

container. Keep the master cylinder

reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture

from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.

This may cause it to boil unexpectedly

during hard or prolonged braking, resulting

in sudden brake failure. This could result in a

collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can

result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine

parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.

Brake fluid can also damage painted and

vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid

its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid to

contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal

components could be damaged, causing

partial or complete brake failure. This could

result in a collision.

Automatic Transmission

Use only a transmission oil with the

characteristics indicated in "Fluids and

Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications".

Special Additives

Do not use any type of additive with the

automatic transmission oil. The

automatic transmission oil is a product

designed specially for this vehicle and its

performance may be compromised

through the use of further additives.

Caution!

Do not use chemical flushes in your

transmission as the chemicals can damage

your transmission components. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Frequency of Oil Changes

In normal vehicle operating conditions, it

is not necessary to change the

transmission oil.

Caution!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an

authorized dealer immediately. Severe

transmission damage may occur. An

authorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with

another battery with the same

specifications. It is advised to contact an

authorized dealer for replacement.

Follow the battery manufacturer's

instructions for maintenance.

229

RAISING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an

authorized dealer which is equipped with

shop jacks or jack arms.

The vehicle lifting points are marked on

the side skirts with the

symbols.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects

of the following information: Tire

Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,

TireTerminology and Definitions, Tire

Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Note:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is

based on U.S. design standards.

P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded

into the sidewall preceding the size

designation. Example: P215/

65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing is

based on European design standards.

Tires designed to this standard have the

tire size molded into the sidewall

beginning with the section width. The

letter "P" is absent from this tire size

designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is

based on U.S. design standards. The size

designation for LT-Metric tires is the

same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the

sidewall preceding the size designation.

Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designed

for temporary emergency use only.

Temporary high pressure compact spare

tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded

into the sidewall preceding the size

designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on

U.S. design standards and it begins with

the tire diameter molded into the

sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

09056V0001EM

Vehicle Lift Point Locations

0601085395US

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT

Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum

Load

2 — Size

Designation

5 — Maximum

Pressure

3 — Service

Description

6 — Treadwear,

Traction and

Temperature

Grades

230

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P =

Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle

loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

231

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

Absence

of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the

full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as

mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

T = Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:

031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

232

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The

vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for

a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation

pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire

placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,

the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Note: The proper cold tire inflation

pressure is listed on the driver’s side

B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's

side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire,

including the spare tire (if equipped), at

least monthly and inflate to the

recommended pressure for your vehicle.

0806115150US

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

0806115151US

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

233

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important

information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried

in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the

front, rear, and spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire

must not exceed the load carrying

capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire's load carrying

capacity if you adhere to the loading

conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire

and Loading Information placard in

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And

Operating” section of this manual.

Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle

condition, gross axle weight ratings

(GAWRs) for the front and rear axles

must not be exceeded. For further

information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,

and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle

Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”

section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading

conditions of your vehicle, locate the

statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire

and Loading Information placard. The

combined weight of occupants,

cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight

(if applicable) should never exceed the

weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For example,

if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750

(5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

GUID-054900418-high.tif

Tire And Loading Information Placard

234

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals

635 kg and there will be five 68 kg

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as

shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. The following table

shows examples on how to calculate

total load, cargo/luggage, and towing

capacities of your vehicle with varying

seating configurations and number and

size of occupants.

This table is for illustration purposes

only and may not be accurate for the

seating and load carry capacity of your

vehicle.

For the following example, the

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

GUID-054900419-high.tif

235

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affect

vehicle handling, and increase your stopping

distance. Use tires of the recommended load

capacity for your vehicle. Never overload

them.

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential

to the safe and satisfactory operation of

your vehicle. Four primary areas are

affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort

Safety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous

and can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing and

can result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road and

chuckholes can cause damage that result in

tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires can

affect vehicle handling and can fail

suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering

problems. You could lose control of your

vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side of

the vehicle to the other can cause the

vehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the

recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation

affect the stability of the vehicle and can

produce a feeling of sluggish response or

over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side to

side may cause erratic and

unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to

side may cause the vehicle to drift left or

right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire

rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel

consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can

cause abnormal wear patterns and

reduced tread life, resulting in the need

for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a

comfortable ride. Over-inflation

produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is

listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear

edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with a

good quality pocket-type pressure gauge.

Do not make a visual judgement when

determining proper inflation. Tires may

look properly inflated even when they are

under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or

visible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure, always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from

entering the valve stem, which could

damage the valve stem.

236

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Inflation pressures specified on the

placard are always “cold tire inflation

pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is

defined as the tire pressure after the

vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of

three hours. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the maximum

inflation pressure molded into the tire

sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if

subject to a wide range of outdoor

temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately

1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air

temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a

garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F

(20°C) and the outside temperature =

32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation

pressure should be increased by 3 psi

(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for

every 12°F (7°C) for this outside

temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to

6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO

NOT reduce this normal pressure build up

or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed

Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at

safe speeds and within posted speed

limits. Where speed limits or conditions

are such that the vehicle can be driven at

high speeds, maintaining correct tire

inflation pressure is very important.

Increased tire pressure and reduced

vehicle loading may be required for

high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to

your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds,

loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle under

maximum load is dangerous. The added

strain on your tires could cause them to fail.

You could have a serious collision. Do not

drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum

capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressures

For vehicle speeds below 100 mph

(160 km/h), recommended cold tire

inflation pressures are listed on the Tire

And Loading Information Placard located

on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge

of the driver's side door.

When driving at speeds 100 mph

(160 km/h) and above, increased tire

pressures and reduced vehicle loading

are required for high-speed vehicle

operation.

For driving speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) recommended cold tire

inflation pressures are listed below

under "High Speed Tire Inflation

Pressure".Vehicle loading condition must

not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver +

three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg)

luggage).

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle under

maximum load is dangerous. The added

strain on your tires could cause them to fail.

You could have a serious collision.

237

Tires Wheel

Recommended Cold

Tire Inflation

Pressure

High Speed Tire

Inflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear

Original Equipment

235/60

R18 103V or 103W 18x8J

30 psi

2.1 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

38 psi

2.6 kPa

235/55 R19 101V or 105V 19x8J

30 psi

2.1 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

38 psi

2.6 kPa

255/45 R20 101H 20x8.5J

33 psi

2.3 kPa

36 psi

2.5 kPa

35 psi

2.4 kPa

39 psi

2.7 kPa

Snow Tires

235/60 R18 103V 18x8J

30 psi

2.1 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

38 psi

2.6 kPa

235/55 R19 101V 19x8J

30 psi

2.1 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

33 psi

2.3 kPa

38 psi

2.6 kPa

255/45 R20 101V 20X8.5J

33 psi

2.3 kPa

36 psi

2.5 kPa

35 psi

2.4 kPa

39 psi

2.7 kPa

Note: Using tires of a different size, type, brand or design on the front and rear may adversely affect vehicle driveability. We

recommend using only tires approved by the manufacturer. The manufacturer cannot determine if unapproved tires are suitable for

use and therefore cannot guarantee vehicle safety in those conditions.

238

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other types

of tires on your vehicle will cause your

vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could

cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires

in sets of four. Never combine them with

other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be

repaired if it meets the following criteria:

The tire has not been driven on when

flat.

The damage is only on the tread

section of your tire (sidewall damage is

not repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of

an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire

repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires

that have experienced a loss of pressure

should be replaced immediately with

another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and

Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to

drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph

(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is

referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run

Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).

Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat

mode it has limited driving capabilities

and needs to be replaced immediately. A

Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle

loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer

while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section

for more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice

conditions, do not spin your vehicle's

wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously

without stopping.

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces

generated by excessive wheel speeds may

cause tire damage or failure. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin

your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds

continuously when you are stuck, and do not

let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter

what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original

equipment tires to help you in

determining when your tires should be

replaced.

0806104865NA

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

239

These indicators are molded into the

bottom of the tread grooves. They will

appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).

When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this

section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent

upon varying factors including, but not

limited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire

inflation pressures can cause uneven

wear patterns to develop across the tire

tread. These abnormal wear patterns will

reduce tread life, resulting in the need for

earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speed

rating of V or higher, and Summer tires

typically have a reduced tread life.

Rotation of these tires per the vehicle

scheduled maintenance is highly

recommended.

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced

after six years, regardless of the remaining

tread. Failure to follow this warning can

result in sudden tire failure. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place

with as little exposure to light as

possible. Protect tires from contact with

oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a

balance of many characteristics. They

should be inspected regularly for wear

and correct cold tire inflation pressures.

The manufacturer strongly recommends

that you use tires equivalent to the

originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the

paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in

this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle

Certification Label for the size

designation of your tire. The Load Index

and Speed Symbol for your tire will be

found on the original equipment tire

sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found

in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating

to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a

tire.

It is recommended to replace the two

front tires or two rear tires as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever

replace a wheel, make sure that the

wheel’s specifications match those of the

original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an

authorized tire dealer or original

equipment dealer with any questions you

may have on tire specifications or

capability. Failure to use equivalent

replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your

vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,

or speed rating other than that specified for

your vehicle. Some combinations of

unapproved tires and wheels may change

suspension dimensions and performance

characteristics, resulting in changes to

steering, handling, and braking of your

vehicle. This can cause unpredictable

handling and stress to steering and

suspension components. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death. Use only the tire and

wheel sizes with load ratings approved for

your vehicle.

240

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Never use a tire with a smaller load index

or capacity, other than what was originally

equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a

smaller load index could result in tire

overloading and failure. You could lose

control and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires

having adequate speed capability can result

in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle

control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of a

different size may result in false

speedometer and odometer readings.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire

Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please

refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,

do not take your vehicle through an

automatic car wash with a compact or

limited use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original

Equipped Tire And Wheel — If

Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

spare tire and wheel equivalent in look

and function to the original equipment

tire and wheel found on the front or rear

axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may

be used in the tire rotation for your

vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the

recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary

emergency use only. You can identify if

your vehicle is equipped with a compact

spare by looking at the spare tire

description on the Tire and Loading

Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the

sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire

descriptions begin with the letter “T” or

“S” preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original equipment tire should be

repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on

your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to

mount a conventional tire on the compact

spare wheel, since the wheel is designed

specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact

spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any

given time.

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are for

temporary emergency use only. With these

spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have

limited tread life. When the tread is worn to

the tread wear indicators, the temporary use

spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to

follow the warnings, which apply to your

spare. Failure to do so could result in spare

tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary

emergency use only. This tire may look

like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is

not. This spare tire may have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the temporary use

full size spare tire needs to be replaced.

Since it is not the same as your original

equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on

the vehicle at the first opportunity.

241

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for

temporary emergency use only. This tire

is identified by a label located on the

limited use spare wheel. This label

contains the driving limitations for this

spare. This tire may look like the original

equipped tire on the front or rear axle of

your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of

this limited use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. Since it is not the same as your

original equipment tire, replace (or

repair) the original equipment tire and

reinstall on the vehicle at the first

opportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,

do not drive more than the speed listed on

the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to

the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard

located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the

rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace

(or repair) the original equipment tire at the

first opportunity and reinstall it on your

vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of

vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially

aluminum and chrome plated wheels,

should be cleaned regularly using mild

(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain

their luster and to prevent corrosion.

Wash wheels with the same soap solution

recommended for the body of the vehicle

and remember to always wash when the

surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to

deterioration caused by salt, sodium

chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium

chloride, etc., and other road chemicals

used to melt ice or control dust on dirt

roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild

soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use

harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can

damage the wheel’s protective coating

that helps keep them from corroding and

tarnishing.

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washes

that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline

additives or harsh brushes. Many

aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic

car washes may damage the wheel's

protective finish. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap is

recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels

including excessive brake dust, care must

be taken in the selection of tire and wheel

cleaning chemicals and equipment to

prevent damage to the wheels. Select a

non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for

aluminum or chrome wheels.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a

bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.

These products may damage the wheel's

protective finish. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap is

recommended.

Note: If you intend parking or storing

your vehicle for an extended period after

cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner,

drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to

remove the water droplets from the

brake components. This activity will

remove the red rust on the brake rotors

and prevent vehicle vibration when

braking.

242

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with these

specialty wheels, DO NOTUSE wheel

cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.

They will permanently damage this finish

and such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH

ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH

A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this

is all that is required to maintain this finish.

TireTypes

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all

seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and

Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All

season tires can be identified by the M+S,

M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire

sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets

of four; failure to do so may adversely

affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If

Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both

wet and dry conditions, and are not

intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If

your vehicle is equipped with Summer

tires, be aware these tires are not

designed for Winter or cold driving

conditions. Install Winter tires on your

vehicle when ambient temperatures are

less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are

covered with ice or snow. For more

information, contact an authorized

dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all

season designation or mountain/

snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

Use Summer tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice

conditions. You could lose vehicle control,

resulting in severe injury or death. Driving

too fast for conditions also creates the

possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the

use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow

tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire

sidewall.

If you need snow tires,

select tires equivalent

in size and type to the

original equipment

tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four;

failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling

of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed

ratings than what was originally equipped

with your vehicle and should not be

operated at sustained speeds over

75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original

equipment or an authorized tire dealer

for recommended safe operating speeds,

loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve

performance on ice, skid and traction

capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires.

Some states prohibit studded tires;

therefore, local laws should be checked

before using these tire types.

243

Snow Chains

It is possible to fit 13 mm chains on all

the tires except for R20.

Use of traction devices require sufficient

tire-to-body clearance. Follow these

recommendations to guard against

damage.

Note:

Traction device must be of proper

size for the tire, as recommended by the

traction device manufacturer.

Use on Rear Tires Only.

Check the tension of the snow chains

after the first few metres have been

driven.

Using snow chains with tires with

non-original dimensions may damage

the vehicle.

Using different tires sizes or types

(M+S, snow, etc.) between the front and

rear axles may adversely affect vehicle

driveability, with the risk of losing

control of the vehicle and resulting

accidents.

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other

suspension components, it is important that

only traction devices in good condition are

used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if

noise occurs that could indicate device

breakage. Remove the damaged parts of

the device before further use.

Install device as tightly as possible and

then retighten after driving about ½ mile

(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with a loaded

vehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry

pavement.

Observe the traction device

manufacturer’s instructions on the method

of installation, operating speed, and

conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device

manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph

(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on a compact

spare tire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

Tires on the front and rear axles of

vehicles operate at different loads and

perform different steering, driving, and

braking functions. For these reasons,

they wear at unequal rates. These effects

can be reduced by timely rotation of

tires. Rotation will increase tread life,

maintain traction levels and contribute to

a smooth, quiet ride.

To resolve this problem, tires should be

rotated at each service interval

(approximately every 10,000 miles

[16,000km]). More frequent rotation is

permissible if desired. The reasons for

any rapid or unusual wear should be

corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If

Equipped

Due to different size tires and wheels on

front and rear axles tire rotation is not

possible for:

2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a

different front and rear tire size.

Caution!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if different

front and rear tire sizes are rotated

244

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire rotation contributes to the

preservation of the grip and traction

performance on wet, muddy or snowy

roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability

of the vehicle.

In the case of irregular wear of the tires

identify the cause and correct it as soon

as possible, by contacting an authorized

dealer.

The rotational direction of the tire must

be taken into consideration when

rotating the tires. The recommended

rotation pattern for directional tires is

shown below.

It is recommended to avoid situations

with a large difference in wear between

the front and rear tires and to strictly use

winter tires of the sizes given on the tire

placard.

The AWD system and the original tires

are developed together to ensure the

vehicle’s best performance. When

changing the tires, it is recommended to

us the same “AR” marked tires, to

maintain the same level of performance

and component life.

DEPARTMENTOF

TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories

were established by the National

Highway Traffic Safety

Administration.The specific grade

rating assigned by the tire's

manufacturer in each category is

shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must

conform to Federal safety

requirements in addition to these

grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a

comparative rating, based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon

the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service

09066V0002EM

Tire Rotation

245

practices, and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These

grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement, as measured

under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction

performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance, which all passenger

vehicle tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by

law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle is left inactive for longer

than a month, the following precautions

should be observed:

Park the vehicle in an area that is

covered and dry, and well-ventilated if

possible. Slightly open the windows.

Check that the electric park brake is

not activated.

Carry out the “Liftgate Emergency

Opening” procedure described in the

“Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To

Know Your Vehicle”.

Disconnect the negative battery

terminal and check the battery charge.

Repeat this check once every three

months during storage.

If the battery is not disconnected from

the electrical system, check its state of

charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted parts

using protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metal

parts using special compounds available

commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on the

windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift

them off the glass.

246

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cover the vehicle with a fabric or

perforated plastic sheet, paying

particular care not to damage the painted

surface by dragging any dust that may

have accumulated on it. Do not use

compact plastic sheets, as they do not

allow humidity to evaporate from the

surface of the vehicle.

Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)

above the standard prescribed pressure

and check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine cooling

system.

Any time the vehicle is left inactive for

two weeks or more, operate the air

conditioning system with engine idling

for at least five minutes, setting external

air and with fan set to maximum speed.

This operation will ensure appropriate

lubrication for the system, thus

minimizing the possibility of damage to

the compressor when the system is

operated again.

Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP

and having closed the driver side door,

wait at least one minute before

disconnecting the electrical supply from

the battery. When reconnecting the

electrical supply to the battery, make

sure that the ignition is in the STOP

position and the driver’s side door is

closed.

BODYWORK

Protection Against Atmospheric

Agents

The vehicle is equipped with the best

available technological solutions to

protect the bodywork against corrosion.

These include:

Painting products and systems which

give the vehicle resistance to corrosion

and abrasion.

Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)

steel sheets, with high resistance to

corrosion.

Spraying of plastic parts, with a

protective function in the more exposed

points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.

Use of “open” boxed sections to

prevent condensation and pockets of

moisture which could favor the formation

of rust inside.

Use of special films to protect against

abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing,

doors, etc.).

Corrosion Warranty

Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion

Warranty against perforation due to rust

of any original element of the structure

or bodywork. For the general terms of

this warranty, refer to the Warranty

Booklet.

PreservingThe Bodywork

Paint

Touch up abrasions and scratches

immediately to prevent the formation of

rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of

washing the vehicle: the frequency

depends on the conditions and

environment where the vehicle is used.

For example, it is advisable to wash the

vehicle more often in areas with high

levels of atmospheric pollution or salted

roads.

Some parts of the vehicle may be

covered with a matte paint which, in

order to be maintained intact, requires

special care.

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow

these instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners are

used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance

of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the

bodywork to avoid damage or alteration.

Build up of water could cause damage to

the vehicle in the long term.

To make it easier to remove any dirt

deposits in the area where the blades are

normally located it is recommended to

position the windshield wipers vertically

(service position), for more information,

refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter.

Wash the bodywork using a low

pressure jet of water if possible.

247

Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy

solution over the bodywork, frequently

rinsing the sponge.

Rinse well with water and dry with a

leather chamois.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door

frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with

special care, as water may stagnate more

easily in these areas. Do not wash the

vehicle after it has been left in the sun or

with the hood hot: this may alter the shine

of the paintwork.

Note: Avoid parking under trees; the

resin dropped by trees makes the

paintwork go opaque and increases the

possibility of corrosion.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in

the same way as the rest of the vehicle.

If washing the vehicle in a service that

moves the vehicle, for vehicles with

automatic transmissions, proceed with

the following directions:

Ensure that the vehicle is on a flat

surface

Disable the automatic engagement of

the parking brake (refer to the “Electric

Park Brake” in “Starting And Operating”

for further information).

With the vehicle stationary, the gear in

NEUTRAL (N) and the brake pedal

depressed, push the STARTbutton.

Note: The vehicle will remain in

NEUTRAL (N) for 15 minutes before

PARK (P) will be engaged automatically.

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean cloths

to prevent scratching or altering the

transparency.

Caution!

Wipe the rear window inside gently with a

cloth following the direction of the filaments

to avoid damaging the heating device.

Front Headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water and

detergent for washing vehicles.

Note:

Never use aromatic substances (e.g.

gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for

cleaning the plastic lenses of the

headlights.

When cleaning with a pressure

washer, keep the pressure washer at

least eight inches (20 cm) away from the

headlights.

Engine Compartment

At the end of every winter, wash the

engine compartment thoroughly, taking

care not to aim the jet of water directly at

the electronic control units or at the

windshield wiper motors. Have this

operation performed at a specialized

workshop.

Note: The washing should take place

with the engine cold and the ignition

device in the STOP position. After the

washing operation, make sure that the

various protections (e.g. rubber caps and

guards) have not been removed or

damaged.

248

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTERIORS

Periodically check the cleanliness of the

interior, beneath the mats, which could

cause oxidation of the sheet metal.

Seats And Fabric Parts

Remove dust with a soft brush or a

vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a

moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the

seats with a sponge moistened with a

solution of water and neutral detergent.

Leather Seats

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or

slightly damp cloth, without exerting too

much pressure.

Remove any liquid or grease stains using

an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing.

Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin

cloth dampened with water and mild

soap. If the stain persists, use specific

products and observe the instructions

carefully.

Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that

the cleaning products used contain no

alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in

small quantities.

Plastic And Coated Parts

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp

cloth (if possible made from microfiber),

and a solution of water and neutral,

non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use

specific products free from solvents and

designed to maintain the original

appearance and color of the components.

Remove any dust using a microfiber

cloth, if necessary moistened with water.

The use of paper tissues is not

recommended as these may leave

residues.

Genuine Leather Parts

Use only water and mild soap to clean

these parts. Never use alcohol or

alcohol-based products.

Before using a specific product for

cleaning interiors, make sure that it does

not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based

substances.

Carbon Fiber Parts

To eliminate small scratches and marks

on the carbon, contact your authorized

dealer. An improperly performed

operation may irreparably damage the

carbon.

249

250

This page is intentionally left blank

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or

those who just want to know every detail

of their vehicle, useful information on

understanding how your vehicle works is

contained in this chapter and illustrated

with data, tables and graphics.

IDENTIFICATION DATA .........252

ENGINE ..................253

POWER SUPPLY .............254

TRANSMISSION .............255

BRAKES ..................256

SUSPENSION ..............257

STEERING ................258

DIMENSIONS...............259

WEIGHTS .................261

FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........262

FLUID CAPACITIES ...........264

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......265

PERFORMANCE .............267

251

IDENTIFICATION DATA

Vehicle Identification Number

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

is stamped on a plate on the front left

corner of the dashboard trim, which can

be seen from outside the vehicle, through

the windshield.

This number is also stamped on the

chassis near the front left shock

absorber and can be seen by opening the

engine compartment hood.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Plate

The plates are located on the left side A

pillar and contain the data about:

Chassis number (VIN).

Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).

Color code.

Place of manufacturing of the vehicle

(USA and Mexico only).

Vehicle manufacturing date.

Maximum permitted weights.

Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA

and Canada only).

10016V0001EM

Vehicle Identification Number

10016V0002EM

Vehicle Identification Number

252

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

2.0L T4 MAir engine 280 HP

Cycle Fo

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84/90

Total displacement (cm³) 1995

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 206

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 400

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3300 - 4400

Fuel

87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is

0–15%.

253

POWER SUPPLY

Power supply

2.0L T4 MAir engine Electronic

timed sequential injection with knock control

254

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TRANSMISSION

Version Transmission Traction

2.0L T4 MAir engine Eight

Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive

2.0L T4 MAir engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse Rear-Wheel Drive

255

BRAKES

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.0L T4 MAir engine Disc

Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is

better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

256

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SUSPENSION

Version Front Rear

2.0L T4 MAir engine

Independent

wheel double-wishbone

suspension

Independent wheel with multilink system

257

STEERING

Version Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.0L T4 MAir engine 38.55

ft (11.75 m)

Rack and pinion with electric power

steering

258

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with

vehicle unladen.

Front

Overhang

Wheelbase

Rear

Overhang

Overall

Length

Overall

Height

Front Track

Rear Track

Overall

Width (Incl

Mirrors)

Overall Width

(Excl Mirrors)

33.9 inches

(862

mm)

111 inches

(2818 mm)

39.7 inches

(1008 mm)

184.6 inches

(4688 mm)

66 inches

(1677 mm)

63.5 inches

(1612 mm)

65 inches

(1650 mm)

85.2 inches

(2163 mm)

74.9 inches

(1903 mm)

Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

10106V0001EM

259

Luggage Compartment Volume

Capacity (VDA standards)

Rear seats not folded

Vehicle unladen: 18.54 cubic feet (525 liters)

260

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.0L T4 MAir Engine AWD 2.0L T4 MAir Engine RWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled

90% and without optional equipment)

3992 3885

Payload including the driver

(*)

992 992

Maximum permitted loads

(**)

242 242

– Front axle 2491 2403

– Rear axle 2976 2932

– Total 5247 5115

Towable loads - -

– Braked trailer 3000 lbs (1360 kg) 3000 lbs (1360 kg)

– Unbraked trailer 1000 lbs (454 kg) 1000 lbs (454 kg)

Maximum load on roof 165 lbs (75 kg) 165 lbs (75 kg)

Maximum load on tow hitch (braked trailer) 300 lbs (136 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum

permitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

261

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This engine is designed

to meet all emission

regulations, and

provide satisfactory

fuel economy and

performance when

using high-quality

unleaded “Regular”

gasoline having a posted octane number

of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/

2 method. For optimal performance the

use of 91 or higher octane “Premium”

gasoline is recommended in these

engines.

While operating on gasoline with the

required octane number, hearing a light

knocking sound from the engine is not a

cause for concern. However, if the engine

is heard making a heavy knocking sound,

see your authorized dealer immediately.

Use of gasoline with a lower than

recommended octane number can cause

engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling, and

hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline

before considering service for the

vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the

use of cleaner burning gasoline referred

to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains

oxygenates and are specifically blended

to reduce vehicle emissions and improve

air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is

recommended. Properly blended

reformulated gasoline will provide

improved performance and durability of

engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded

gasoline with oxygenates such as

ethanol.

Caution!

DO NOTuse E-85, gasoline containing

methanol, or gasoline containing more than

15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends

may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system

components, cause emissions to exceed the

applicable standard, and/or cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate.

Please observe pump labels as they should

clearly communicate if a fuel contains

greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline

containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15)

or gasoline containing methanol are not

the responsibility of the manufacturer

and may void or not be covered under

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to

run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or

liquid propane (LP) may result in damage

to the engine, emissions, and fuel system

components. Problems that result from

running CNG or LP are not the

responsibility of the manufacturer and

may void or not be covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-

containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase

octane. Gasoline blended with MMT

provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane

number without MMT. Gasoline blended

with MMT reduces spark plug life and

reduces emissions system performance

in some vehicles. The manufacturer

recommends that gasoline without MMT

be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the

gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask

your gasoline retailer whether the

gasoline contains MMT. MMT is

prohibited in Federal and California

reformulated gasoline.

262

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the

proper octane rating, gasolines that

contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended.

Using gasolines that have these additives

will help improve fuel economy, reduce

emissions, and maintain vehicle

performance.

Designated TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline

contains a higher level

of detergents to

further aide in

minimizing engine and

fuel system deposits.

When available, the usage of Top Tier

Detergent gasoline is recommended.

Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system

cleaning agents should be avoided. Many

of these materials intended for gum and

varnish removal may contain active

solvents or similar ingredients. These can

harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm

materials.

Fuel System Cautions

Caution!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your

vehicle’s performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited

by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can

impair engine performance and damage the

emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or

ignition malfunctions can cause the

catalytic converter to overheat. If you

notice a pungent burning odor or some light

smoke, your engine may be out of tune or

malfunctioning and may require immediate

service. Contact an authorized dealer for

service assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are now

being sold as octane enhancers, is not

recommended. Most of these products

contain high concentrations of methanol.

Fuel system damage or vehicle

performance problems resulting from the

use of such fuels or additives is not the

responsibility of the manufacturer and may

void or not be covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with the

emissions control system can result in

civil penalties being assessed against

you.

263

FLUID CAPACITIES

2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric

Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters

Fuel

tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.3 Gallons 8.8 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.25 Liters

Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters

RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.3 Liters

RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

264

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the

Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications.

Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Engine Lubrication

Engine Features Specification Replacement interval

2.0 T4 MAir

AE 0W-30

API SN

MS-13340

9.55535–GS1

AccordingTo Maintenance Plan

If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used to top

up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

265

Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

8HP 50 – Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA9

Differential

RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU

210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /

2.0 T4 MAir engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 synthetic

lubricant

FPW9.55550–DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case

SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550–DA11 AWD System transfer case

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant

CUNA NC956–16

ASTMD3306

MS.90032

Mix a minimum solution of 50%

engine coolant. Not mixable with

different formulation products.

(*)

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043

To be used diluted or undiluted in

windshield washer/wiper systems.

HVAC R1234yf – –

(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

Caution!

The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the

warranty.

266

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PERFORMANCE

Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Engine Top speed mph / (km/h)

Acceleration from 0-60 mph / (0-100 km/h)

sec.

2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP AWD Engine 144

/ (232) 5.4

2.0L T4 MAir 280 HP RWD Engine 144 / (232) 5.7

267

268

This page is intentionally left blank

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING

SERVICE FOR YOURVEHICLE . . . .270

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ......270

WARRANTY INFORMATION .....271

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .272

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .272

269

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING

SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be

sure to bring the right papers with you, as

well as your warranty folder. All work to

be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with

the service manager. Keep a maintenance

log of your vehicle's service history, as

this can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's

problems or the specific work you want

done. If you've had an accident or work

done that is not on your maintenance log,

let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must

have your vehicle by the end of the day,

discuss the situation with the service

advisor and list the items in order of

priority. At many authorized dealers, you

may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal

daily charge. If you need a rental, it is

advisable to make these arrangements

when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized

dealer are vitally interested in your

satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an

authorized dealer. We strongly

recommend that you take the vehicle to

an authorized dealer. They know your

vehicle the best, and are most concerned

that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer's authorized

dealer have the facilities, factory-trained

technicians, special tools, and the latest

information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an

authorized dealer service manager first.

Most matters can be resolved with this

process.

If for some reason you are still not

satisfied, talk to the general manager or

owner of the authorized dealer. They

want to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable to

resolve the concern, you may contact the

manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the

manufacturer's customer center should

include the following information:

Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (home and

office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA

(1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)

Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Customer Assistance For The Hearing

Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing

difficulties, the manufacturer has installed

special TDD (Telecommunication Devices

for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired

customer, who has access to a TDD or a

conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the

United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-2479.

Canadian residents with hearing

difficulties that require assistance can

use the special needs relay service

offered by Bell Canada. ForTTY

teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for

Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to

connect with a Bell Relay Service

operator.

270

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service

contract for a vehicle to help protect you

from the high cost of unexpected repairs

after the manufacturer's New Vehicle

Limited Warranty expires. The

manufacturer stands behind only the

manufacturer's service contracts. If you

purchased a manufacturer's service

contract, you will receive Plan Provisions

and an Owner Identification Card in the

mail within three weeks of the vehicle

delivery date. If you have any questions

about the service contract, call the

manufacturer's Service Contract

National Customer Hotline at

1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents,

call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)

387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind

any service contract that is not the

manufacturer's service contract. It is not

responsible for any service contract

other than the manufacturer's service

contract. If you purchased a service

contract that is not a manufacturer's

service contract, and you require service

after the manufacturer's New Vehicle

Limited Warranty expires, please refer to

the contract documents, and contact the

person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a

major investment when you purchased

the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also

made a major investment in facilities,

tools, and training to assure that you are

absolutely delighted with the ownership

experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty

issues or related concerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines

only), some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit,

chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth defects, or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain, or emit, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects, or other

reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet,

for the terms and provisions of FCA US

LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties

applicable to this vehicle and market.

271

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect that could cause a crash or

cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your

authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to

http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov .

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

safety defect, you should contact the

Customer Service Department

immediately. Canadian customers

who wish to report a safety defect to

the Canadian government should

contact Transport Canada, Motor

Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may

use either the website or the phone

numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard,

American Express, and Discover orders

are accepted.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals

provide the information that students

and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem

solving, maintaining, servicing, and

repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the

vehicle, system, and/or components is

written in straightforward language with

illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled

with diagrams, charts and detailed

illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians

to find and fix problems on

computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find

and correct problems the first time, using

step-by-step troubleshooting and

drivability procedures, proven diagnostic

tests and a complete list of all tools and

equipment.

272

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been

prepared with the assistance of service

and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.

Included are starting, operating,

emergency and maintenance procedures

as well as specifications, capabilities and

safety tips.

Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

273

274

This page is intentionally left blank

INDEX

Accessories Purchased By The

Owner....................4

Active Safety Systems ..........98

Adaptive Cruise Control.........160

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) ............160

Additives, Fuel ..............263

AFS Function ................39

AirBag...................118

Advance Front Air Bag ........118

Air Bag Operation ...........120

Air Bag Warning Light ........117

Driver Knee Air Bag ..........120

Enhanced Accident Response . . .124

Enhanced Accident Response . . .212

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....212

Front Air Bag .............118

If Deployment Occurs ........123

Knee Impact Bolsters ........120

Maintaining Your Air Bag System .126

Maintenance ..............126

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light......................118

Side Air Bags .............120

Transporting Pets...........136

Air Bag Light.............117,137

Air Pressure

Tires...................236

Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........22

Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....154

Alfa DNA System.............152

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....98

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ......264

Automatic Dimming Mirror ........36

Automatic Headlights ...........38

Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC)...................47

Automatic Transmission ........146

Auxiliary Driving Systems........102

B-Pillar Location .............233

Battery...................221

Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....17

Battery Recharging ...........222

Belts, Seat .................137

Blind Spot Monitoring

..........102

Bodywork

(Cleaning And

Maintenance) .............247

Brakes ...................256

Brake Fluid Level ...........221

Brightness, Interior Lights ........43

Bulbs, Light ................138

Camera, Rear ...............172

Capacities, Fluid .............264

Carbon Monoxide Warning .......137

Certification Label ............179

Changing A Flat Tire ...........230

Chart, Tire Sizing .............231

Check Engine Light (Malfunction

Indicator Light) .............94

Checking Levels .............219

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . .137

Checks, Safety ..............137

Child Restraint ..............126

Child Restraints

Booster Seats .............128

Child Seat Installation ........135

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat

Belt ...................133

Infants And Child Restraints . . . .128

LATCH Positions ...........130

Lower Anchors And Tethers For

Children ................130

Older Children And Child

Restraints ...............128

Seating Positions ...........129

Clean Air Gasoline ............262

Cleaning

Wheels .................242

Climate Control ............45,48

Close The Hood ...............56

Compact Spare Tire ...........241

Contract, Service .............271

Cooling System

Coolant Capacity ...........264

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)......................264

Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb

Replacement) .............192

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .160

Cupholder ..................66

Cupholders .................66

Customer Assistance ..........270

Daytime Running Lights..........38

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ......38

Defroster, Windshield ..........137

Dimensions ................259

Direction Indicators (Changing A

Bulb)...................191

Disabled Vehicle Towing.........209

Door Light ..................41

Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock —

Rear Doors ................27

Power Door Locks ...........27

Doors.....................23

Drive Train Control (DTC) System ....98

Driving Modes ..............152

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System .................101

Electric Park Brake............144

Electric Remote Mirrors .........36

Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....36

Electronic Speed Control ........158

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise

Control) ..............158,160

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System ..................99

Emergency, In Case Of..........203

Hazard Warning Flasher .......188

Jacking .................230

Jump Starting .............206

Overheating ..............208

Towing ..............209,211

Emission Control System

Maintenance...............94

Engine ...................253

Block Heater ..............143

Engine Coolant Level .........221

Exhaust Gas Caution .........137

Fuel Requirements ..........262

Jump Starting .............206

il....................264

Oil Selection ..............264

Overheating ..............208

Starting ................208

Engine Compartment ..........219

Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .248

Engine Oil

Level Check ..............220

Engine Overheating ...........208

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature ..............124,212

Ethanol...................262

Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........137

Exhaust System .............137

Exterior Lighting ............37,39

Exterior Lights ............37,138

Flashers

Hazard Warning ............188

Turn Signal ............40,138

Fluid Capacities..............264

Fluid Leaks ................138

Fluids And Lubricants ..........265

Forward Collision Warning (System) .105

Front Light Cluster With Main Beam

Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights

(Bulb Replacement)..........191

Front Seat Electric Heating .......30

Front Seats (Power Adjustment) ....29

Front Wipers

Wiper Operation ............43

Fuel

Additives ...............263

Clean Air ................262

Ethanol .................262

Materials Added ...........263

Methanol ................262

Tank Capacity .............264

Fuse Boxes ................194

Fuses (Replacement) ..........193

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....62

INDEX

Gasoline, Clean Air ............262

Gasoline, Reformulated .........262

General Information ........104,109

Glove Compartment ............61

Glove Compartment Light ........41

Glove Compartment Light (Bulb

Replacement) .............192

Gross Axle Weight Rating........180

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......180

GVWR...................179

Hazard Warning Flasher.........188

Head Restraints ..............33

Head Rests .................33

Headlights

Switch ................37,39

Headlights (Cleaning) ..........248

Heated Mirrors ...............37

Heater, Engine Block...........143

High Beam Headlights...........39

Automatic High Beam Headlights.......................39

Hill Decent Control (HDC) System. . .101

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System .....100

Hitches

Trailer Towing .............181

Hood .....................55

Hood Release ................55

Identification Data ............252

Ignition....................19

Installing Electrical/Electronic

Devices...................4

Instrument Cluster.............68

Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster Display ......69

Reconfigurable Instrument

Cluster Display .............70

Instrument Panel Features

Instrument Panel Features ......68

Interior Ambient Lighting .........41

Interior Lights................40

Interiors (Cleaning)............249

Internal Equipment ............61

Jack Operation ..............230

Jump Starting ............206,207

Key Fob

Remote Keyless Entry .........16

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote

Keyless Entry) ..............17

Key, Replacement .............18

Keyless Enter-N-Go

assive Entry ..............24

Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer

System ..................21

Lane Change ................40

Lane Change And Turn Signals ......40

Lane Departure Warning System . . .173

LaneSense.................173

Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........113

Latches...................138

Leaks, Fluid ................138

Life Of Tires ................240

Liftgate ...................56

Lifting The Vehicle ............230

Light Bulbs.................138

Types Of Bulbs ............189

Light Switch.................37

Lights....................138

AirBag.................117

AirBag.................137

Automatic Headlights .........38

Courtesy/Reading .......40,41,42

Daytime Running ............38

Exterior ................138

Hazard Warning Flasher .......188

Headlight Switch ..........37,39

Headlights .............37,39

High Beam ................39

Instrument Cluster ........37,39

Intensity Control ............43

Interior ................41,42

Map Reading ..............40

Park ...................38

Reading .................40

Turn Signal ............40,138

Loading Vehicle ..............179

Tires...................233

Locks

Power Door ...............23

Steering Wheel .............20

Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb

Replacement) .............192

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine) ..................94

Manual, Service..............272

Methanol..................262

Mirrors....................36

Automatic Dimming ..........36

Electric Powered ............36

Electric Remote ............36

Heated ..................37

OBD System ................94

Occupant Restraints...........112

Oil, Engine

Capacity ................264

Recommendation ..........264

Viscosity ................264

Overheating, Engine ...........208

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . .272

Paintwork (Cleaning And

Maintenance) .............247

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .100

Park Sensors System ..........167

Performance (Top Speed)........267

Pets.....................136

Placard, Tire And Loading

Information ..............233

Power

Door Locks ...............23

Mirrors ..................36

Seats ...................29

Sunroof .................54

Power Sunroof ...............54

Power Supply ...............254

PregnantWomen And Seat Belts . . .116

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ...............116

ProlongedVehicle Inactivity ......246

Radial Ply Tires ..............239

Radio Frequency

General Information ......18,20,27

Radio Transmitters And Mobile

Phones ...................5

Rear Armrest ................66

Rear Camera ...............172

Rear Cross Path ............

.102

Rear

Seats..................31

Rear Window Wiper/Washer .......45

Reformulated Gasoline .........262

Refueling Procedure ...........176

Refueling The Vehicle ..........176

Reminder, Seat Belt ...........113

Remote Starting System ........140

Replacement Keys .............18

Replacement Tires ............240

Replacing A Bulb .............188

Replacing An External Bulb .......191

Replacing An Internal Bulb .......192

Reporting Safety Defects .......272

Restraint, Head ...............33

Restraints, Child .............126

Rims And Tires ..............230

Roll Over Warning ..............3

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle......137

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....138

Safety Defects, Reporting .......272

Safety Information, Tire.........230

Safety Tips ................137

Safety, Exhaust Gas ...........137

Saving Fuel ................186

Scheduled Servicing ...........214

Scheduled Servicing Program (2.0L

T4 MAir Engine Versions) ......216

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage ...............115

Energy Management Feature . . . .116

Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........113

PregnantWomen ...........116

Seat Belt Pretensioner .......116

INDEX

Seat Belt Reminder ..........113

Seat Belt Reminder ...........113

Seat Belts ..............112,137

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ......115

Adjustable Upper Shoulder

Anchorage ...............115

Child Restraints ............126

Front Seat ...............112

Front Seat ...............113

Inspection ...............137

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .115

PregnantWomen ...........116

Pretensioners .............116

Rear Seat ...............113

Untwisting Procedure ........115

Seats .....................28

Head Restraints ............33

Height Adjustment ...........29

Power ..................29

Tilting ..................29

Sentry Key Replacement .........18

Service Assistance............270

Service Contract .............271

Service Manuals .............272

Servicing Procedures ..........223

Shoulder Belts ..............113

Signals, Turn..............40,138

Snow Chains................244

Snow Tires.................243

Spare Tire .................241

Spare Tires .............241,242

Speed Control

Accel/Decel ..............159

Cancel .................159

Resume ................159

Set ...................158

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .160

Speed Limiter ...............157

Starting ..................208

Cold Weather

.............141

Starting

And Operating .........208

Starting Procedures ...........208

Starting The Engine ...........140

Steering ..................258

Tilt Column ...............35

Wheel Lock ...............20

Wheel, Heated .............36

Wheel, Tilt ................35

Steering Wheel ...............35

Stop/Start System............155

Suggestions For Driving.........186

Sun Roof ...................54

Sun Visors ..................62

Supplemental Restraint System - Air

Bag ...................118

Suspension ................257

Symbols ....................7

Telescoping Steering Column ......35

Tilt Steering Column............35

Tire And Loading Information

Placard .................233

Tire Markings ...............230

Tire Safety Information .........230

Tire Service Kit ..............203

Tires ...........138,236,241,245

Aging (Life Of Tires) .........240

Air Pressure ..............236

Changing ................230

Compact Spare ............241

Flat Changing .............203

General Information ......236,241

General Information .........241

High Speed ..............237

Inflation Pressure ...........236

Jacking .................230

Life Of Tires ..............240

Load Capacity .............233

Load Capacity .............234

Quality Grading ............245

Radial ..................239

Replacement .............240

Safety ..............230,236

Sizes ..................231

Snow Tires ...............243

Spare Tire ...............241

Spare Tires ............241,242

Spinning ................239

Trailer Towing .............183

Tread Wear Indicators ........239

To Open Hood ................55

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .....182

Towing................180,182

Disabled Vehicle ...........209

Towing Eyes ................211

TowingThe Vehicle ............211

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System).................109

Traction Control System (TCS)......99

Trailer Towing ...............180

Cooling System Tips .........185

Hitches .................181

Minimum Requirements ......182

Tips...................184

Trailer And Tongue Weight .....182

Wiring .................184

Trailer Towing Guide ...........182

Trailer Weight ...............182

Transmission ...............255

Transporting Pets ............136

Tread Wear Indicators ..........239

Turn Signals .................40

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......245

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .115

Use Of The Owner’s Manual ........6

Vehicle Changes/Alterations .......4

Vehicle Identification Number .....252

Vehicle Loading ...........179,234

Vent Operation ...............

Warning Flasher, Hazard ........188

Warning, Roll Over ..............3

Warranty Information ..........271

Washer Fluid For

Windshield/Headlights........221

Washers, Windshield............43

Weights ..................261

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......242

Wheel And Wheel TireTrim .......242

Wheels And Tires .............230

Windows (Cleaning) ...........248

Windshield Defroster ..........137

Windshield Wiper .............43

Replacing Blades ...........226

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Smart Washing Function .......44

Windshield Wipers .............43

Wrecker Towing..............209

INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road highway

motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals

including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to

the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing

exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a

well-ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

ALFA ROMEO STELVIO

Third Edition Rev 1

Owner’s Manual

ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Printed in U.S.A.

2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

18GU-126-AC

Alfa Romeo 2018 Stelvio suv 2018 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Alfa Romeo 2018 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO Questions and Answers

Related Products

Alfa Romeo 2021 Stelvio suv 2021 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO

Alfa Romeo 2022 Stelvio suv 2022 ALFA ROMEO STELVIO

Vevor LY-RD0619 Rooftop Tent Hard Shell 2-3 Person Waterproof for Jeep SUV Truck wLadder

Vevor 2240606 SUV Camping Tent Outdoor SUV Tent with Awning Waterproof for 5-8 Person

Vevor LY-SJ6211 Rooftop Tent Hard Shell 2-3 Person Waterproof for Jeep SUV Truck wLadder

Vevor LY-YS6161 Rooftop Tent Hard Shell 2-3 Person Waterproof for Jeep SUV Truck wLadder